TRANSMISSION & DRIVELINE

TRANSAXLE & TRANSMISSION

SECTION TM B

TM

E
CONTENTS
7AT: RE7R01A A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : High and Low Reverse F
Clutch Solenoid Valve .............................................17
PRECAUTION ............................................... 6 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Low Brake Solenoid
Valve ........................................................................17 G
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 6 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Anti-interlock Solenoid
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Valve ........................................................................18
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : 2346 Brake Solenoid
SIONER" ................................................................... 6 H
Valve ........................................................................18
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover...... 6 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Torque Converter
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ............. 7 Clutch Solenoid Valve .............................................19
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Line Pressure Solenoid I
and A/T ...................................................................... 7 Valve ........................................................................19
General Precautions ................................................. 7 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Manual Mode Switch ....20
Service Notice or Precaution ..................................... 8 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Paddle Shifter ...............20 J
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Selector Lever Position
PREPARATION ............................................ 9 Indicator ...................................................................20
PREPARATION ................................................... 9 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM .......................................20 K
Special Service Tool ................................................. 9 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts
Commercial Service Tool ........................................ 10 Location ...................................................................21
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Shift Lock Relay ........21 L
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................. 12
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Stop Lamp Switch ....22
COMPONENT PARTS .......................................12 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Shift Lock Unit ...........22

STRUCTURE AND OPERATION ..................... 23 M

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM ........................................... 12
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Lo-
TRANSMISSION ........................................................23
cation ....................................................................... 12
TRANSMISSION : Cross-Sectional View ................23 N
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : TCM ............................. 14
TRANSMISSION : System Diagram ........................25
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Transmission Range
TRANSMISSION : System Description ...................25
Switch ...................................................................... 14
TRANSMISSION : Component Description .............48
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Output Speed Sensor.... 15 O
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Speed Sensor .... 15 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM .......................................48
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : A/T Fluid Temperature A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : System Description....48
Sensor ..................................................................... 15
P
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Clutch Solenoid SYSTEM ............................................................ 51
Valve ....................................................................... 15
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM ...........................................51
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Front Brake Solenoid
Valve ....................................................................... 16 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description .......51
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram .............52
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Direct Clutch Solenoid
Valve ....................................................................... 16 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-Safe .......................52
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Protection Control .........55

Revision: 2015 January TM-1 2015 Q50

LINE PRESSURE CONTROL ................................... 56 Inspection and Judgment ...................................... 102
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL : System Descrip-
tion .......................................................................... 56 A/T POSITION .................................................. 103
Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 103
SHIFT CHANGE CONTROL ..................................... 58
SHIFT CHANGE CONTROL : System Description DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 104
... 58
U0100 LOST COMMUNICATION (ECM A) ...... 104
SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL .................................... 60 DTC Description .................................................... 104
SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL : System Descrip- Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 104
tion .......................................................................... 61
U0300 CAN COMMUNICATION DATA ........... 105
LOCK-UP CONTROL ................................................ 61 DTC Description .................................................... 105
LOCK-UP CONTROL : System Description ........... 62 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 105
NAVI SHIFT CONTROL ............................................ 63 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ........................... 107
NAVI SHIFT CONTROL : System Description ....... 63 DTC Description .................................................... 107
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 108
INFINITI DRIVE MODE SELECTOR ......................... 64
Infiniti Drive Mode Selector : System Description ... 65 P0615 STARTER RELAY ................................. 109
DTC Description .................................................... 109
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION
METER) ..................................................................... 66 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 109
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR A.. 111
METER) : Shift Position Indicator ........................... 66 DTC Description .................................................... 111
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST ....................... 67 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 112
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning/ P0710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERA-
Indicator (On Information Display) .......................... 67
TURE SENSOR A ............................................. 113
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ..... 68 DTC Description .................................................... 113
Diagnosis Description ............................................. 68 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 115

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM) ............................ 69 P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A ................... 116
CONSULT Function ................................................ 69 DTC Description .................................................... 116
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 117
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 74
P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR ................... 118
TCM .................................................................... 74 DTC Description .................................................... 118
Reference Value ..................................................... 74 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 119
Fail-Safe ................................................................. 80
Protection Control ................................................... 83 P0725 ENGINE SPEED .................................... 120
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................. 83 DTC Description .................................................... 120
DTC Index .............................................................. 84 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 120

WIRING DIAGRAM ..................................... 86 P0729 6GR INCORRECT RATIO ..................... 122

DTC Description .................................................... 122
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM ................................... 86 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 124
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 86
P0730 INCORRECT GEAR RATIO .................. 125
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ............................... 93 DTC Description .................................................... 125
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 93 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 126

BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 96 P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO ..................... 127

DTC Description .................................................... 127
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ........ 96 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 129
Diagnosis Flow ....................................................... 96
Question sheet ....................................................... 97 P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO ..................... 130
DTC Description .................................................... 130
A/T FLUID COOLER .......................................... 99 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 132
Cleaning ................................................................. 99
Inspection ..............................................................101 P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO ..................... 133
DTC Description .................................................... 133
STALL TEST .................................................... 102 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 135

Revision: 2015 January TM-2 2015 Q50

P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO ..................... 136 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 171
DTC Description .................................................... 136 A
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 138 P2722 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID E . 172
DTC Description .................................................... 172
P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO ..................... 139 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 173
B
DTC Description .................................................... 139
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 141 P2731 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID F . 174
DTC Description .................................................... 174
P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER ........................ 142 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 175 C
DTC Description .................................................... 142
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 143 P2807 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID G. 176
DTC Description .................................................... 176
P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER ........................ 144 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 177 TM
DTC Description .................................................... 144
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 145 MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT ................................................................ 178 E
P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A.. 146 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 178
DTC Description .................................................... 146
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 146 SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT ........ 180
Description ............................................................. 180 F
P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID A ............................. 147 Component Function Check .................................. 180
DTC Description .................................................... 147 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 180
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 148 G
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ................................... 181
P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B.. 149
DTC Description .................................................... 149 WITH ICC ................................................................. 181
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 150 WITH ICC : Component Function Check ............... 181 H
WITH ICC : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 181
P0780 SHIFT .................................................... 151 WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Shift Lock
DTC Description .................................................... 151 Unit) ....................................................................... 184 I
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 152 WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Shift Lock Re-
lay) ......................................................................... 184
P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID C.. 153 WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Stop Lamp
DTC Description .................................................... 153 J
Switch) ................................................................... 185
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 154
WITHOUT ICC .......................................................... 185
P1705 TP SENSOR .......................................... 155 WITHOUT ICC : Component Function Check ....... 185 K
DTC Description .................................................... 155 WITHOUT ICC : Diagnosis Procedure .................. 185
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 155 WITHOUT ICC : Component Inspection (Shift
Lock Unit) .............................................................. 187
P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL ................... 157 L
WITHOUT ICC : Component Inspection (Stop
DTC Description .................................................... 157 Lamp Switch) ......................................................... 187
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 158
SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR . 188 M
P1730 INTERLOCK .......................................... 159 Description ............................................................. 188
DTC Description .................................................... 159 Component Function Check .................................. 188
Judgment of Interlock ............................................ 160 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 188
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 160 N
Component Inspection (Selector Lever Position
P1734 7GR INCORRECT RATIO ..................... 161 Indicator) ................................................................ 190
DTC Description .................................................... 161 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 192 O
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 163
SYSTEM SYMPTOM ....................................... 192
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH ................................ 164 Symptom Table ..................................................... 192
DTC Description .................................................... 164 P
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 165 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ...................... 202
Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch) ..... 169
Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Up)] ......... 169 A/T FLUID ....................................................... 202
Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Down)] .... 169 Inspection .............................................................. 202
Changing ............................................................... 202
P2713 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID D.. 170 Adjustment ............................................................. 204
DTC Description .................................................... 170

Revision: 2015 January TM-3 2015 Q50

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 205 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY .......................... 239

A/T SHIFT SELECTOR .................................... 205 2WD ......................................................................... 239

Exploded View .......................................................205 2WD : Exploded View ........................................... 239
Removal and Installation .......................................207 2WD : Removal and Installation ............................ 239
Inspection and Adjustment ....................................209 2WD : Inspection and Adjustment ......................... 241

SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR . 210 AWD ........................................................................ 242

Exploded View .......................................................210 AWD : Exploded View ........................................... 242
Removal and Installation .......................................210 AWD : Removal and Installation ........................... 243
Inspection ..............................................................210 AWD : Inspection and Adjustment ........................ 245

CONTROL ROD ............................................... 211 UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY .. 246

Exploded View .......................................................211
Removal and Installation .......................................212
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY .......................... 246
Exploded View ...................................................... 246
Inspection and Adjustment ....................................213
Oil Channel ........................................................... 258
PADDLE SHIFTER .......................................... 214 Location of Needle Bearings and Bearing Races . 258
Exploded View .......................................................214 Location of Snap Rings ......................................... 261
Removal and Installation .......................................214 Disassembly .......................................................... 263
Assembly .............................................................. 279
CONTROL VALVE & TCM .............................. 215 Inspection .............................................................. 303
Exploded View .......................................................215
Removal and Installation .......................................216 OIL PUMP, 2346 BRAKE, FRONT BRAKE
Inspection and Adjustment ....................................219 PISTON ............................................................. 306
Exploded View ...................................................... 306
PARKING COMPONENTS .............................. 220 Disassembly .......................................................... 307
Assembly .............................................................. 310
2WD ..........................................................................220
Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 313
2WD : Exploded View ............................................220
2WD : Removal and Installation ............................220 UNDER DRIVE CARRIER, FRONT BRAKE
2WD : Inspection and Adjustment .........................224 HUB .................................................................. 315
REAR OIL SEAL .............................................. 225 Exploded View ...................................................... 315
Disassembly .......................................................... 315
2WD ..........................................................................225 Assembly .............................................................. 316
2WD : Exploded View ............................................225 Inspection .............................................................. 316
2WD : Removal and Installation ............................225
2WD : Inspection ...................................................226 FRONT CARRIER, INPUT CLUTCH, REAR
INTERNAL GEAR ............................................. 318
AWD .........................................................................226 Exploded View ...................................................... 318
AWD : Exploded View ...........................................226 Disassembly .......................................................... 319
AWD : Removal and Installation ............................226 Assembly .............................................................. 320
AWD : Inspection ...................................................227 Inspection .............................................................. 322
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR ............................. 228 MID SUN GEAR, REAR SUN GEAR, HIGH
AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH HUB .............. 323
2WD ..........................................................................228
Exploded View ...................................................... 323
2WD : Exploded View ............................................228
Disassembly .......................................................... 323
2WD : Removal and Installation ............................228
Assembly .............................................................. 325
2WD : Inspection ...................................................232
Inspection .............................................................. 327
AIR BREATHER .............................................. 233
HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH ............. 328
Exploded View .......................................................233
Exploded View ...................................................... 328
Removal and Installation .......................................233
Disassembly .......................................................... 328
Inspection ..............................................................234
Assembly .............................................................. 329
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM ............................... 235 Inspection .............................................................. 329
Exploded View .......................................................235
DIRECT CLUTCH ............................................. 330
Removal and Installation .......................................237
Exploded View ...................................................... 330
Inspection and Adjustment ....................................238
Disassembly .......................................................... 330
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .... 239 Assembly .............................................................. 330

Revision: 2015 January TM-4 2015 Q50

 Inspection .............................................................. 331 Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releas-
es ........................................................................... 333 A
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS Stall Speed ............................................................ 333
(SDS) .......................................................... 332 Torque Converter .................................................. 333
Total End Play ....................................................... 334 B
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS Reverse Brake Clearance ..................................... 334
(SDS) ................................................................ 332 Front Brake Clearance .......................................... 334
General Specification ............................................ 332 2346 Brake Clearance ........................................... 334
Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs ...... 332 C

TM

Revision: 2015 January TM-5 2015 Q50

 PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000011281057

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Ser-
vice Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000011281058

When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc to prevent damage to
windshield.

PIIB3706J

Revision: 2015 January TM-6 2015 Q50

 PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal INFOID:0000000011281059

A
• When removing the 12V battery terminal, turn OFF the ignition
switch and wait at least 30 seconds.
NOTE: B
ECU may be active for several tens of seconds after the ignition
switch is turned OFF. If the battery terminal is removed before ECU
stops, then a DTC detection error or ECU data corruption may
occur. C
• For vehicles with the 2-batteries, be sure to connect the main bat-
tery and the sub battery before turning ON the ignition switch.
NOTE: TM
If the ignition switch is turned ON with any one of the terminals of
SEF289H
main battery and sub battery disconnected, then DTC may be
detected.
• After installing the 12V battery, always check "Self Diagnosis Result" of all ECUs and erase DTC. E
NOTE:
The removal of 12V battery may cause a DTC detection error.
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T INFOID:0000000011281060
F

The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration. G
CAUTION:
• Always turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable before any repair or
inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will cause H
the MIL to illuminate.
• Always connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to illuminate due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.) I
• Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-lock-
ing type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-7, "Harness Connec-
tor". J
• Always route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with a
bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to illuminate due to the short circuit.
• Always connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube may
cause the MIL to illuminate due to the malfunction of the EVAP system or fuel injection system, etc. K
• Always erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and TCM
(Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.
L
General Precautions INFOID:0000000011281061

• Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable

from the negative terminal before connecting or disconnect- M
ing the A/T assembly connector. Because battery voltage is
applied to TCM even if ignition switch is turned OFF.
N

SEF289H

Revision: 2015 January TM-7 2015 Q50

 PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
• Perform “DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE” after performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS.
If the repair is completed DTC should not be displayed in the
“DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
• Always use the specified brand of ATF. Refer to MA-10, "Fluids
and Lubricants".
• Use lint-free paper not cloth rags during work.
• Dispose of the waste oil using the methods prescribed by law, ordi-
nance, etc. after replacing the ATF.
• Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside
of the transmission. It is important to prevent the internal parts from
JSBIA1315ZZ
becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
• Disassembly should be done in a clean work area.
• Use lint-free paper or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere
with the operation of the transmission.
• Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly.
• All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or
reassembly.
• Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the transmission is disassembled.
• It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated.
• The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced.
Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent springs
and small parts from becoming scattered or lost.
• Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight.
• Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings and
seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Never use grease.
• Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling.
• When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the ATF is drained. Old ATF will remain in torque con-
verter and ATF cooling system.
Always follow the procedures under “Changing” when changing ATF. Refer to TM-202, "Changing".
• Occasionally, the parking gear may be locked with the torque insufficiently released, when stopping the vehi-
cle by shifting the selector lever from “D” or “R” to “P” position with the brake pedal depressed.
In this case, the shock with a thud caused by the abrupt release of torque may occur when shifting the selec-
tor lever from “P” position to other positions.
However, this symptom is not a malfunction which results in the damage of parts.
Service Notice or Precaution INFOID:0000000011281062

ATF COOLER SERVICE

If ATF contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.), or if a transmission is repaired, overhauled, or
replaced, inspect and clean the A/T fluid cooler mounted in the radiator or replace the radiator. Flush cooler
lines using cleaning solvent and compressed air after repair. For A/T fluid cooler cleaning procedure, refer to
TM-99, "Cleaning". For radiator replacement, refer to CO-15, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2015 January TM-8 2015 Q50

 PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000011281063
B
The actual shapes of TechMate tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(TechMate No.) Description C
Tool name
ST33400001 • Installing rear oil seal (2WD)
(J-26082) • Installing oil pump housing oil seal TM
Drift
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 47 mm (1.85 in) dia.
E

NT086

KV31102400 • Installing reverse brake return spring retainer F

(J-34285 and J-34285-87) • Removing and installing 2346 brake spring retain-
Clutch spring compressor er
a: 320 mm (12.60 in)
G
b: 174 mm (6.85 in)

NT423
H

KV31103800 Removing and installing front brake spring retainer

Clutch spring compressor
1. M12×1.75P I

JSDIA1749ZZ

ST25850000 Removing oil pump assembly

K
(J-25721-A)
Sliding hammer
a: 179 mm (7.05 in)
b: 70 mm (2.76 in) L
c: 40 mm (1.57 in)
d: M12X1.75P
NT422
M

Revision: 2015 January TM-9 2015 Q50

 PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000011281064

Tool name Description

Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts

PBIC0190E

Drift Installing manual shaft oil seals

a: 22 mm (0.87 in) dia.

NT083

Drift Installing rear oil seal (AWD)

a: 64 mm (2.52 in) dia.

SCIA5338E

Pin punch Removing retaining pin

a: 4 mm (0.16 in) dia.

NT410

Lint-free paper Cleaning transmission

JSDIA4746ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-10 2015 Q50

 PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Tool name Description
A
Wire Checking torque converter one-way clutch
a: Approx. 15 mm (0.59 in)
b: Approx. 100 mm (3.94 in)
c: Approx. 3 mm (0.118 in) [Bend a 1.5 B
(0.059) dia. wire in half.]

C
JSDIA4560ZZ

1. 315268E000* Changing and adjustment A/T fluid

O-ring
2. 310811EA5A* TM
Charging pipe

JSDIA1332ZZ

*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. F

Revision: 2015 January TM-11 2015 Q50

 COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000011281065

JSDIA4291ZZ

A/T shift selector assembly Transmission assembly

No. Component Function

Mainly transmits the following signal to TCM via CAN communication.
• Drive mode signal
Chassis control module
Refer to DAS-394, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation lo-
cation.
Mainly transmits the following signal to TCM via CAN communication.
• Vehicle speed signal
• Manual mode signal
• Non-manual mode signal
• Manual mode upshift signal
• Manual mode downshift signal
Combination meter • Paddle shifter upshift signal*1
• Paddle shifter downshift signal*1
Mainly receives the following signals from TCM via CAN communication.
• Shift position signal
• Manual mode shift refusal signal
Refer to MWI-7, "METER SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for de-
tailed installation location.

Paddle shifter (down)*1 TM-20, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Paddle Shifter"

Revision: 2015 January TM-12 2015 Q50

 COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
No. Component Function
A
Paddle shifter (up)*1 TM-20, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Paddle Shifter"

Selector lever position indicator TM-20, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Selector Lever Position Indicator"

Drive mode select switch DMS-6, "Drive Mode Select Switch" B

NAVI control unit AV-19, "NAVI Control Unit"

Mainly transmits the following signal to TCM via CAN communication.*3 C

• Curve signal
• Road data signal
• Vehicle speed signal
Display control unit • NAVI shift control switch signal TM
Mainly receives the following signals from TCM via CAN communication.*3
• NAVI shift control status signal
Refer to AV-14, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation loca- E
tion.
Mainly transmits the following signal to TCM via CAN communication.
• Stop lamp switch signal
BCM F
Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location"
for detailed installation location.
Mainly transmits the following signal to TCM via CAN communication.
• Engine and A/T integrated control signal G
NOTE:
General term for the communication (torque-down permission, torque-
down request, etc.) exchanged between the ECM and TCM.
• Engine speed signal H
• Engine coolant temperature signal
ECM • Accelerator pedal position signal
• Closed throttle position signal
• Wide open throttle position signal I
• ASCD OD cancel request signal
• NAVI shift control indication request signal*3
Refer to EC-17, "ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Loca- J
tion" for detailed installation location.
Mainly transmits the following signal to TCM via CAN communication.
• ABS operation signal
K
• TCS gear keep request signal
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) • A/T shift schedule change demand signal
• Side G sensor signal
Refer to BRC-10, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation loca- L
tion.
Position select switch (up)
Manual
mode Position select switch (down) TM-20, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Manual Mode Switch" M
switch
Mode select switch

A/T assembly connector — N

Output speed sensor TM-15, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Output Speed Sensor"

Revision: 2015 January TM-13 2015 Q50

 COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
No. Component Function

TCM*2 TM-14, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : TCM"

Transmission range switch*2 TM-14, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Transmission Range Switch"

Input speed sensor 1, 2*2 TM-15, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Speed Sensor"

A/T fluid temperature sensor*2 TM-15, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor"

Input clutch solenoid valve*2 TM-15, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Clutch Solenoid Valve"

Direct clutch solenoid valve*2 TM-16, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Direct Clutch Solenoid Valve"

Control High and low reverse clutch solenoid TM-17, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : High and Low Reverse Clutch Solenoid
valve & valve*2 Valve"
TCM
Front brake solenoid valve*2 TM-16, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Front Brake Solenoid Valve"

Low brake solenoid valve*2 TM-17, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Low Brake Solenoid Valve"

2346 brake solenoid valve*2 TM-18, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : 2346 Brake Solenoid Valve"

Anti-interlock solenoid valve*2 TM-18, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Anti-interlock Solenoid Valve"

Line pressure solenoid valve*2 TM-19, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Line Pressure Solenoid Valve"
Torque converter clutch solenoid TM-19, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid
valve*2 Valve"

*1: With paddle shifter

*2: These components are included in control valve & TCM.
*3: For North America
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : TCM INFOID:0000000011281066

• The TCM is integral with the control valve assembly and built
into the transmission assembly.
• The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal
input and output and for power supply.
• The vehicle driving status is judged based on the signals from the
sensors, switches, and other control units, and the optimal trans-
mission control is performed.
• For TCM control items, refer to TM-51, "A/T CONTROL SYSTEM :
System Description".

JSDIA4272ZZ

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Transmission Range Switch INFOID:0000000011281067

• The transmission range switch is installed to control valve

assembly.
• The transmission range switch incorporates four contact switches.
Each contact switch transmits an ON/OFF signal to the TCM.
• The TCM judges a select lever position from a combination of ON/
OFF signals transmitted from each contact switch.

Transmission range switch

Select lever position
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
P OFF OFF OFF OFF
JSDIA4274ZZ
R ON OFF OFF ON
N ON ON OFF OFF
D and M ON ON ON ON

Revision: 2015 January TM-14 2015 Q50

 COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Output Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000011281068

A
• The output speed sensor is installed to rear side of transmission
case.
• The output speed sensor detects the revolution of the parking gear B
and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal is transmitted to the
TCM which converts it into vehicle speed.
C

TM
JSDIA4273ZZ

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000011281069

E
• The input speed sensor is installed to control valve assembly.
• The input speed sensor detects input shaft rpm (revolutions per
minute). It is located on the input side of the A/T. Monitors revolu- F
tion of sensor 1 and sensor 2 for non-standard conditions.

H
JSDIA4275ZZ

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor INFOID:0000000011281070

I
• The A/T fluid temperature sensor is installed to control valve
assembly.
• The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature J
and transmits a signal to the TCM.

JSDIA4276ZZ

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Input Clutch Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000011281071 M

• The input clutch solenoid valve is installed to control valve

assembly.
N
• The input clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in
response to signals transmitted from the transmission range
switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor.
Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. O
• The input clutch solenoid valve controls the input clutch control
valve in response to a signal transmitted from the TCM.
P

JSDIA4277ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-15 2015 Q50

 COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
• The input clutch solenoid valve utilizes the linear solenoid valve [N/
H (normal high) type].
NOTE:
• The principle of the linear solenoid valve utilizes the fact that the
force pressing on the valve spool installed inside the coil
increases nearly in proportion to the current. This allows it to pro-
duce a fluid pressure that is proportional to this pressing force.
• The N/H (normal high) produces hydraulic control when the coil
is not energized.

JSDIA3647GB

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Front Brake Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000011281072

• The front brake solenoid valve is installed to control valve

assembly.
• The front brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in
response to signals transmitted from the transmission range
switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor.
Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position.
• The front brake solenoid valve controls the front brake control
valve in response to a signal transmitted from the TCM.

JSDIA4278ZZ

• The front brake solenoid valve utilizes a linear solenoid valve [N/L
(normal low) type].
NOTE:
• The principle of the linear solenoid valve utilizes the fact that the
force pressing on the valve spool installed inside the coil
increases nearly in proportion to the current. This allows it to pro-
duce a fluid pressure that is proportional to this pressing force.
• The N/L (normal low) type does not produce hydraulic control
when the coil is not energized.

JSDIA3648GB

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Direct Clutch Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000011281073

• The direct clutch solenoid valve is installed to control valve

assembly.
• The direct clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in
response to signals transmitted from the transmission range
switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor.
Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position.
• The direct clutch solenoid valve controls the direct clutch control
valve in response to a signal transmitted from the TCM.

JSDIA4279ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-16 2015 Q50

 COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
• The direct clutch solenoid valve utilizes the linear solenoid valve
[N/H (normal high) type]. A
NOTE:
• The principle of the linear solenoid valve utilizes the fact that the
force pressing on the valve spool installed inside the coil
B
increases nearly in proportion to the current. This allows it to pro-
duce a fluid pressure that is proportional to this pressing force.
• The N/H (normal high) produces hydraulic control when the coil
is not energized. C

JSDIA3647GB

TM
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : High and Low Reverse Clutch Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000011281074

• The high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve is installed to

control valve assembly. E
• The high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the
TCM in response to signals transmitted from the transmission
range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position F
sensor. Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position.
• The high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve controls the high
and low reverse clutch control valve in response to a signal trans-
mitted from the TCM. G

JSDIA4280ZZ
H
• The high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve utilizes the linear
solenoid valve [N/H (normal high) type].
NOTE: I
• The principle of the linear solenoid valve utilizes the fact that the
force pressing on the valve spool installed inside the coil
increases nearly in proportion to the current. This allows it to pro- J
duce a fluid pressure that is proportional to this pressing force.
• The N/H (normal high) produces hydraulic control when the coil
is not energized.
K

JSDIA3647GB

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Low Brake Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000011281075 L

• The low brake solenoid valve is installed to control valve assem-

bly. M
• The low brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response
to signals transmitted from the transmission range switch, output
speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will
then be shifted to the optimum position. N
• The low brake solenoid valve controls the low brake control valve
in response to a signal transmitted from the TCM.
O

JSDIA4281ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-17 2015 Q50

 COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
• The low brake solenoid valve utilizes a linear solenoid valve [N/L
(normal low) type].
NOTE:
• The principle of the linear solenoid valve utilizes the fact that the
force pressing on the valve spool installed inside the coil
increases nearly in proportion to the current. This allows it to pro-
duce a fluid pressure that is proportional to this pressing force.
• The N/L (normal low) type does not produce hydraulic control
when the coil is not energized.

JSDIA3648GB

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Anti-interlock Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000011281076

• The anti-interlock solenoid valve is installed to control valve

assembly.
• The anti-interlock solenoid valve prevents the simultaneous activa-
tion of the input clutch and the low brake.
• The anti-interlock solenoid valve is an ON/OFF type solenoid
valve.

JSDIA4282ZZ

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : 2346 Brake Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000011281077

• The 2346 brake solenoid valve is installed to control valve

assembly.
• The 2346 brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in
response to signals transmitted from the transmission range
switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor.
Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position.
• The 2346 brake solenoid valve controls the 2346 brake control
valve in response to a signal transmitted from the TCM.

JSDIA4283ZZ

• The 2346 brake solenoid valve utilizes a linear solenoid valve [N/L
(normal low) type].
NOTE:
• The principle of the linear solenoid valve utilizes the fact that the
force pressing on the valve spool installed inside the coil
increases nearly in proportion to the current. This allows it to pro-
duce a fluid pressure that is proportional to this pressing force.
• The N/L (normal low) type does not produce hydraulic control
when the coil is not energized.

JSDIA3648GB

Revision: 2015 January TM-18 2015 Q50

 COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000011281078

A
• The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is installed to control
valve assembly.
• The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the B
gear in D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, M2, M3, M4, M5, M6 and M7 by the
TCM in response to signals transmitted from the output speed sen-
sor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Torque converter clutch
piston operation will then be controlled. C

TM
JSDIA4284ZZ

• The torque converter clutch solenoid valve utilizes a linear sole- E

noid valve [N/L (normal low) type].
NOTE:
• The principle of the linear solenoid valve utilizes the fact that the F
force pressing on the valve spool installed inside the coil
increases nearly in proportion to the current. This allows it to pro-
duce a fluid pressure that is proportional to this pressing force.
• The N/L (normal low) type does not produce hydraulic control G
when the coil is not energized.

JSDIA3648GB H

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Line Pressure Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000011281079

• The line pressure solenoid valve is installed to control valve I

assembly.
• The line pressure solenoid valve regulates the oil pump discharge
pressure to suit the driving condition in response to a signal trans- J
mitted from the TCM.

L
JSDIA4285ZZ

• The line pressure solenoid valve utilizes a linear solenoid valve [N/
L (normal low) type]. M
NOTE:
• The principle of the linear solenoid valve utilizes the fact that the
force pressing on the valve spool installed inside the coil N
increases nearly in proportion to the current. This allows it to pro-
duce a fluid pressure that is proportional to this pressing force.
• The N/L (normal low) type does not produce hydraulic control
when the coil is not energized. O

JSDIA3648GB
P

Revision: 2015 January TM-19 2015 Q50

 COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Manual Mode Switch INFOID:0000000011281080

• The manual mode switch [mode select switch , position select

switch (up) , and position select switch (down) ] is installed to
the A/T shift selector assembly.
• The mode select switch detects the position (the main shift gate
side or manual shift gate side) of the selector lever and transmits a
manual mode signal or a not manual mode signal to the combina-
tion meter. Then, the TCM receives a manual mode signal or non-
manual mode signal from the combination meter.
• The position select switch (up) detects that the selector lever is
shifted to the upshift side of the manual shift gate and transmits a
manual mode upshift signal to the combination meter. Then, the JSDIA4286ZZ
TCM receives a manual mode upshift signal from the combination
meter.
• The position select switch (down) detects that the selector lever is shifted to the downshift side of the manual
shift gate and transmits a manual mode downshift signal to the combination meter. Then, the TCM receives
a manual mode downshift signal from the combination meter.
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Paddle Shifter INFOID:0000000011281081

• The paddle shifter is installed to steering column.

• When operating the paddle shifter (up/down), a paddle shifter
upshift signal or paddle shifter downshift signal is transmitted to the
combination meter. Then, the TCM receives a paddle shifter
upshift signal or a paddle shifter downshift signal from the combi-
nation meter.

JSDIA4287ZZ

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Selector Lever Position Indicator INFOID:0000000011281082

• Selector lever position indicator is installed to console finisher.

• Selector lever position indicator indicates selector lever position.

JSDIA4708ZZ

A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

Revision: 2015 January TM-20 2015 Q50

 COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000011281083

TM

JSDIA4292ZZ
M

Engine room, RH (Vehicle speed Engine room, RH (Direct adaptive Brake pedal
sensitive P/S models) steering models) N
A/T shift selector assembly

No. Component Function O

Shift lock relay* TM-21, "A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Shift Lock Relay"

Stop lamp switch TM-22, "A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Stop Lamp Switch" P
Shift lock unit TM-22, "A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Shift Lock Unit"

*: With ICC
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Shift Lock Relay INFOID:0000000011281084

• Shift lock relay is controlled by stop lamp switch.

• When shift lock relay turns ON, power is applied to shift lock unit.

Revision: 2015 January TM-21 2015 Q50

 COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Stop Lamp Switch INFOID:0000000011281085

WITH ICC
• When brake pedal is depressed, stop lamp switch turns ON.
• When stop lamp switch turns ON, power is supplied to shift lock relay.
WITHOUT ICC
• When brake pedal is depressed, stop lamp switch turns ON.
• When stop lamp switch turns ON, power is supplied to shift lock unit.
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Shift Lock Unit INFOID:0000000011281086

WITH ICC
The shift lock unit operates according to the signal from shift lock relay. Refer to TM-48, "A/T SHIFT LOCK
SYSTEM : System Description" for detailed operation of shift lock unit.
WITHOUT ICC
The shift lock unit operates according to the signal from stop lamp switch. Refer to TM-48, "A/T SHIFT LOCK
SYSTEM : System Description" for detailed operation of shift lock unit.

Revision: 2015 January TM-22 2015 Q50

 STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
A
TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION : Cross-Sectional View INFOID:0000000011281087
B
2WD MODELS
C

TM

J
JSDIA1852ZZ

Low brake Drum support Reverse brake

K
Direct clutch High and low reverse clutch 2nd one-way clutch

Rear carrier*1 Mid carrier Input clutch

Front sun gear*2 Front carrier*3 Under drive carrier L

1st one-way clutch Front brake 2346 brake

Input shaft*4 Torque converter Oil pump

M
Under drive sun gear*2 Under drive internal gear*3 Front internal gear*4
Mid sun gear Mid internal gear*1 Rear sun gear
Rear internal gear High and low reverse clutch hub Control valve & TCM N
Parking gear Rear extension Output shaft
*1: 7 and 23 are one unit.
*2: 10 and 19 are one unit. O
*3: 11 and 20 are one unit.
*4: 16 and 21 are one unit.
P
AWD MODELS

Revision: 2015 January TM-23 2015 Q50

 STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

JSDIA1774ZZ

Low brake Drum support Reverse brake

Direct clutch High and low reverse clutch 2nd one-way clutch

Rear carrier*1 Mid carrier Input clutch

Front sun gear*2 Front carrier*3 Under drive carrier

1st one-way clutch Front brake 2346 brake

Input shaft*4 Torque converter Oil pump

Under drive sun gear*2 Under drive internal gear*3 Front internal gear*4
Mid sun gear Mid internal gear*1 Rear sun gear
Rear internal gear High and low reverse clutch hub Control valve & TCM
Parking gear Adapter case Output shaft
*1: 7 and 23 are one unit.
*2: 10 and 19 are one unit.
*3: 11 and 20 are one unit.
*4: 16 and 21 are one unit.

Revision: 2015 January TM-24 2015 Q50

 STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
TRANSMISSION : System Diagram INFOID:0000000011281088

TM

P
JSDIA0877GB

TRANSMISSION : System Description INFOID:0000000011281089

DESCRIPTION

Revision: 2015 January TM-25 2015 Q50

 STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
With the use of 4 sets of planetary gears, A/T enables 7-speed transmission for forward and 1-speed transmis-
sion for backward, depending on the combination of 3 sets of multiple-disc clutches, 4 sets of multiple-disc
brakes and 2 sets of one-way clutches.
CLUTCH AND BRAKE CHART

JSDIA1455GB

POWER TRANSMISSION
“N” Position

Revision: 2015 January TM-26 2015 Q50

 STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

TM

JSDIA0880GB

Since the low brake is released, torque from the input shaft drive is not transmitted to the output shaft. P
“P” Position

Revision: 2015 January TM-27 2015 Q50

 STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

JSDIA1277GB

• The same as for the “N” position, since the low brake is released, so torque from the input shaft drive is not
transmitted to the output shaft.
• The parking pawl linked with the selector lever meshes with the parking gear and fastens the output shaft
mechanically.
“D1” Position

Revision: 2015 January TM-28 2015 Q50

 STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

TM

JSDIA0866GB

• The 1st one-way clutch regulates counterclockwise rotation of the under drive carrier. P
• The 2nd one-way clutch regulates counterclockwise rotation of the rear sun gear.
• The mid sun gear is fixed by the low brake.
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.

Revision: 2015 January TM-29 2015 Q50

 STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Front planetary gear
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from front internal Deceleration from front internal Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions
gear gear input shaft

Under drive planetary gear

Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
Condition — Fixed Input/Output
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution
Acceleration from under drive in- Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
ternal gear front carrier

Rear planetary gear

Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from rear internal Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
gear under drive internal gear

Mid planetary gear

Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from mid internal Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
gear rear carrier

“M1” Position

Revision: 2015 January TM-30 2015 Q50

 STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

TM

JSDIA0867GB

• The 1st one-way clutch and the front brake regulate counterclockwise rotation of the under drive carrier. P
NOTE:
The front brake operates only while coasting.
• The 2nd one-way clutch and the high and low reverse clutch regulate counterclockwise rotation of the rear
sun gear.
NOTE:
The high and low reverse clutch operates only while coasting.
• The mid sun gear is fixed by the low brake.

Revision: 2015 January TM-31 2015 Q50

 STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.
Front planetary gear
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from front internal Deceleration from front internal Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions
gear gear input shaft

Under drive planetary gear

Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
Condition — Fixed Input/Output
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution
Acceleration from under drive in- Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
ternal gear front carrier

Rear planetary gear

Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from rear internal Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
gear under drive internal gear

Mid planetary gear

Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from mid internal Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
gear rear carrier

“D2” Position

Revision: 2015 January TM-32 2015 Q50

 STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

TM

JSDIA0868GB

• The front sun gear and the under drive sun gear are fixed by the 2346 brake. P
• The 2nd one-way clutch regulates counterclockwise rotation of the rear sun gear.
• The mid sun gear is fixed by the low brake.
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.

Revision: 2015 January TM-33 2015 Q50

 STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Front planetary gear
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from front internal Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
gear input shaft

Under drive planetary gear

Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
Condition Fixed — Input/Output
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from under drive in- Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
ternal gear front carrier

Rear planetary gear

Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from rear internal Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
gear under drive internal gear

Mid planetary gear

Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from mid internal Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
gear rear carrier

“M2” Position

Revision: 2015 January TM-34 2015 Q50

 STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

TM

JSDIA0869GB

• The front sun gear and the under drive sun gear are fixed by the 2346 brake. P
• The 2nd one-way clutch and the high and low reverse clutch regulate counterclockwise rotation of the rear
sun gear.
NOTE:
The high and low reverse clutch operates only while coasting.
• The mid sun gear is fixed by the low brake.
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.

Revision: 2015 January TM-35 2015 Q50

 STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Front planetary gear
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from front internal Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
gear input shaft

Under drive planetary gear

Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
Condition Fixed — Input/Output
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from under drive in- Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
ternal gear front carrier

Rear planetary gear

Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from rear internal Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
gear under drive internal gear

Mid planetary gear

Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions — Deceleration from mid internal gear
rear carrier

“D3” and “M3” Positions

Revision: 2015 January TM-36 2015 Q50

 STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

TM

JSDIA0870GB

• The front sun gear and the under drive sun gear are fixed by the 2346 brake. P
• The direct clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the rear carrier.
• The mid sun gear is fixed by the low brake.
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.

Revision: 2015 January TM-37 2015 Q50

 STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Front planetary gear
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from front internal Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
gear input shaft

Under drive planetary gear

Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
Condition Fixed — Input/Output
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from under drive in- Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
ternal gear front carrier

Rear planetary gear

Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Same number of revolution as the Same number of revolution as the Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions
rear internal gear rear internal gear under drive internal gear

Mid planetary gear

Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions — Deceleration from mid internal gear
rear carrier

“D4” and “M4” Positions

Revision: 2015 January TM-38 2015 Q50

 STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

TM

JSDIA0871GB

• The front sun gear and the under drive sun gear are fixed by the 2346 brake. P
• The direct clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the rear carrier.
• The high and low reverse clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the mid sun gear.
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.

Revision: 2015 January TM-39 2015 Q50

 STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Front planetary gear
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from front internal Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
gear input shaft

Under drive planetary gear

Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
Condition Fixed — Input/Output
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from under drive in- Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
ternal gear front carrier

Rear planetary gear

Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Same number of revolution as the Same number of revolution as the Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions
rear internal gear rear internal gear under drive internal gear

Mid planetary gear

Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Same number of revolution as the Same number of revolution as the Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions
mid internal gear mid internal gear rear carrier

“D5” and “M5” Positions

Revision: 2015 January TM-40 2015 Q50

 STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

TM

JSDIA0872GB

• The input clutch gets engaged and connects the mid internal gear with the rear carrier. P
• The direct clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the rear carrier.
• The high and low reverse clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the mid sun gear.
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.

Revision: 2015 January TM-41 2015 Q50

 STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Rear planetary gear
Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition — input/Output —
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Same number of revolution as the Same number of revolution as the Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions
rear carrier input shaft rear carrier

Mid planetary gear

Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Same number of revolution as the Same number of revolution as the Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions
mid internal gear mid internal gear input shaft

“D6” and “M6” Positions

Revision: 2015 January TM-42 2015 Q50

 STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

TM

JSDIA0873GB

• The front sun gear and the under drive sun gear are fixed by the 2346 brake. P
• The input clutch gets engaged and connects the mid internal gear with the rear carrier.
• The high and low reverse clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the mid sun gear.
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.

Revision: 2015 January TM-43 2015 Q50

 STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Front planetary gear
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from front internal Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
gear input shaft

Rear planetary gear

Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition — Input/Output Input
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Same number of revolution as the Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions Acceleration from rear carrier
input shaft front carrier

Mid planetary gear

Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions Acceleration from mid internal gear Acceleration from mid internal gear
input shaft

“D7” and “M7” Positions

Revision: 2015 January TM-44 2015 Q50

 STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

TM

JSDIA0874GB

• The under drive carrier is fixed by the front brake. P

• The input clutch gets engaged and connects the mid internal gear with the rear carrier.
• The high and low reverse clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the mid sun gear.
• Each planetary gear enters state described below.

Revision: 2015 January TM-45 2015 Q50

 STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Front planetary gear
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from front internal Deceleration from front internal Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions
gear gear input shaft

Under drive planetary gear

Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
Condition — Fixed Input/Output
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution
Acceleration from under drive inter- Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
nal gear front carrier

Rear planetary gear

Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition — Input/Output Input
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Same number of revolution as the Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions Acceleration from rear carrier
input shaft under drive internal gear

Mid planetary gear

Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions Acceleration from mid internal gear Acceleration from mid internal gear
input shaft

“R” Position

Revision: 2015 January TM-46 2015 Q50

 STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

TM

JSDIA0875GB

• The 1st one-way clutch and the front brake regulate counterclockwise rotation of the under drive carrier. P
NOTE:
The front brake operates at the fixed speed or less.
• The rear carrier and the mid internal gear are fixed by the reverse brake.
• The mid sun gear rotates at the same speed as the rear sun gear by operation of the 2nd one-way clutch
and the high and low reverse clutch.
NOTE:
The high and low reverse clutch operates at the fixed speed or less.

Revision: 2015 January TM-47 2015 Q50

 STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.
Front planetary gear
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from front internal Deceleration from front internal Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions
gear gear input shaft

Under drive planetary gear

Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
Condition — Fixed Input/Output
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution
Acceleration from under drive inter- Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
nal gear front carrier

Rear planetary gear

Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition Output Fixed Input
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution
Acceleration from rear internal Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
gear under drive internal gear

Mid planetary gear

Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Condition Input Output Fixed
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Counterclockwise revolution —
Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions Deceleration from mid sun gear —
rear sun gear

TRANSMISSION : Component Description INFOID:0000000011281090

Name of the Part (Abbreviation) Function

Front brake (FR/B) Fastens the under drive carrier.
Input clutch (I/C) Connects the input shaft, the mid internal gear and the rear carrier.
Direct clutch (D/C) Connects the rear carrier and the rear sun gear.
High and low reverse clutch (HLR/C) Connects the rear sun gear and the mid sun gear.
Reverse brake (R/B) Fastens the rear carrier.
Low brake (L/B) Fastens the mid sun gear.
2346 brake (2346/B) Fastens the under drive sun gear.
Allows the under drive carrier to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens it for reverse
1st one-way clutch (1st OWC)
rotation.
Allows the rear sun gear to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens it for reverse ro-
2nd one-way clutch (2nd OWC)
tation.
Torque converter Amplifies driving force the engine, and transmits it to transmission input shaft.
Driven by the engine, oil pump supplies oil to torque converter, control valve assembly, and
Oil pump
each lubricating system.

A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000011281091

• Shift lock prevents an unintentional start of the vehicle that may be caused by an incorrect operation while
selector lever is in the “P” position.

Revision: 2015 January TM-48 2015 Q50

 STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
• Selector lever can be shifted from the “P” position to another position when the following conditions are sat-
isfied. A
- Ignition switch ON
- Stop lamp switch is ON (brake pedal is depressed)
- Selector lever knob button is pressed
B
SHIFT LOCK MECHANISM

TM

JSDIA0998ZZ
H
Shift lock unit
Shift lock release button Slider Electromagnet
I
Stopper Iron plate Plate
Detent pin Detent gate
J
SHIFT LOCK OPERATION AT P POSITION
When brake pedal is not depressed (Unable to shift selector lever)
Without brake pedal depressed and with ignition switch ON, electro- K
magnet of slider is not magnetized because of non electrical
current. When selector lever knob button is pressed in this situation,
detent pin lowers. According to the movement of detent pin, plate L
also lowers while pressing slider into shift lock unit. However,
stopper pressed by spring comes underneath plate. Plate cannot
lower further when it contacts stopper, and detent pin cannot lower to
M
the point that releases selector lever. Thus selector lever stays in the
“P” position and selector lever is unable to shift.

JSDIA1000ZZ N
When brake pedal is depressed (Able to shift selector lever)
With brake pedal depressed and with ignition switch ON, electro-
magnet of slider becomes magnetized because of live electric- O
ity. stopper has an iron plate to unify stopper with slider when
electromagnet becomes magnetized. When selector lever knob but-
ton is pressed in this situation, detent pin lowers. According to the P
movement of detent pin, plate also lowers while pressing slider
into shift lock unit. Because stopper is unified with slider, the slider
unit moves into shift lock unit. Detent pin lowers to the point that
releases selector lever from the “P” position and selector lever
becomes able to shift.
JSDIA0999ZZ

FORCIBLE RELEASE OF SHIFT LOCK

Revision: 2015 January TM-49 2015 Q50
 STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
• When an electrical or mechanical malfunction occurs in shift lock
system, selector lever shift operation from the “P” position
becomes impossible. When shift lock release button is pressed
in this state, stopper is forcibly pressed into shift lock unit, and
then it becomes possible to release shift lock.

JSDIA1001ZZ

• To release the shift lock forcibly and shift the selector lever from “P” position to other positions, follow the
steps below.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Apply parking brake.
3. Remove shift lock cover and press the shift lock release but-
ton using suitable tool.
4. Press and hold the selector lever knob button and move the
selector lever from “P” position to other positions while press the
shift lock release button.

JSDIA4316ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-50 2015 Q50

 SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
SYSTEM
A
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000011281092
B
SYSTEM DIAGRM
C

TM

K
JSDIA4484GB

NOTE:
Paddle shifter is applied to vehicle with paddle shifter. L
MAIN CONTROL OF TCM

Controls Reference M
Line pressure control TM-56, "LINE PRESSURE CONTROL : System Description"
Shift change control TM-58, "SHIFT CHANGE CONTROL : System Description"
N
Shift pattern control TM-61, "SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL : System Description"
Lock-up control TM-62, "LOCK-UP CONTROL : System Description"
NAVI shift control* TM-63, "NAVI SHIFT CONTROL : System Description" O
Infiniti drive mode selector TM-65, "Infiniti Drive Mode Selector : System Description"
Fail-safe TM-80, "Fail-Safe"
Self-diagnosis TM-69, "CONSULT Function" P
CONSULT communication TM-69, "CONSULT Function"
*: For North America

Revision: 2015 January TM-51 2015 Q50

 SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram INFOID:0000000011281093

JSDIA4508GB

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000011281094

TCM has the electrical fail-safe mode. The mode is divided into a maximum of 3 phases (1st fail-safe, 2nd fail-
safe and final fail-safe) and functions so that the operation can be continued even if the signal circuit of the
main electronically controlled input/output parts is damaged.

Revision: 2015 January TM-52 2015 Q50

 SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Even if the electronic circuit is normal, the fail-safe mode may start under special conditions (such as when the
brake pedal is depressed suddenly from a hard wheel spin status to stop the rotation of wheels). In this case, A
turn the ignition switch OFF and back to ON after 5 seconds to resume the normal shift pattern.
Consequently, the customer's vehicle may already return to the normal condition. Refer to TM-96, "Diagnosis
Flow".
B
The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
1st fail-safe
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction- C
2nd fail-safe
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
Final fail-safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving. TM
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.

FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
E
Vehicle behavior for 1st fail- Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail- Vehicle behavior for final fail-
DTC Vehicle condition
safe safe safe
P0615 — Starter is disabled — Starter is disabled
F
• Fixed in the “D” position • Fixed in the “D” position
(The shifting can be per- (The shifting can be per-
formed) formed) G
• Lock-up is prohibited when • Lock-up is prohibited when
30 km/h (19 MPH) or less 30 km/h (19 MPH) or less
• The shifting between the • The shifting between the
gears of 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 can gears of 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 can
H
P0705 — be performed — be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited
• Shift position indicator is • Shift position indicator is
I
switched OFF switched OFF
• Starter relay is switched • Starter relay is switched
OFF (starter is disabled) OFF (starter is disabled)
• Back-up lamp is OFF • Back-up lamp is OFF J
• Large shift shock • Large shift shock
• The shifting between the
gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be • The shifting between the
Between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 — K
performed gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be
P0710 • Manual mode is prohibited performed
Between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 • Fix the gear while driving • Manual mode is prohibited
— L
-7 • Manual mode is prohibited
• The shifting between the
gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be • The shifting between the
Between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 —
performed gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be M
P0717 • Manual mode is prohibited performed
Between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 • Fix the gear while driving • Manual mode is prohibited
—
-7 • Manual mode is prohibited
N
• Only downshift can be per-
formed
• Manual mode is prohibited
Between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 • A vehicle speed signal — O
from the unified meter and
A/C amp. is regarded as • The shifting between the
an effective signal gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be
P0720 P
performed
• Fix the gear at driving • Manual mode is prohibited
• Manual mode is prohibited
Between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 • A vehicle speed signal
—
-7 from the unified meter and
A/C amp. is regarded as
an effective signal

Revision: 2015 January TM-53 2015 Q50

 SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Vehicle behavior for 1st fail- Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail- Vehicle behavior for final fail-
DTC Vehicle condition
safe safe safe
P0720
and — Locks in 5GR — Locks in 5GR
P1721
P0725 — — — —
Engine torque limit: Max 150 Engine torque limit: Max 150
Small gear ratio difference —
Nm Nm
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the
gears of 1 - 2 can be per-
Neutral mal- formed
function be- • The shifting between the
• Locks in 2GR, 3GR or 4GR
tween the — gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be
• Manual mode is prohibited
gears of 1 - 2 - performed
3 and 7 • The shifting between the
gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be
performed
P0729
• Manual mode is prohibited
P0731
P0732 • Locks in 1GR
P0733 Great gear • The shifting between the
P0734 ratio differ- gears of 1 - 2 can be per-
P0735 ence formed
P1734 • The shifting between the
gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be
performed
• Locks in 1GR, 2GR, 3GR, • The shifting between the
• The shifting between the
Other than 4GR, 5GR or 6GR gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be
gears of 2 - 3 - 4 can be
the above • Fix the gear while driving performed
performed
• Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited
• The shifting between the
gears of 3 - 4 can be per-
formed
• The shifting between the
gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be
performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the
• The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 can be per-
• Locks in 5GR, 6GR or 7GR gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be formed
P0730 —
• Manual mode is prohibited performed • The shifting between the
• Manual mode is prohibited gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be
performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Lock-up is prohibited • Lock-up is prohibited
P0740 — —
• Slip lock-up is prohibited • Slip lock-up is prohibited
• Lock-up is prohibited • Lock-up is prohibited
P0744 — —
• Slip lock-up is prohibited • Slip lock-up is prohibited
P0745 — — — —

Revision: 2015 January TM-54 2015 Q50

 SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Vehicle behavior for 1st fail- Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail- Vehicle behavior for final fail-
DTC Vehicle condition
safe safe safe A
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the
gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be B
performed
P0750
• The shifting between the
P0775
gears of 3 - 4 - 5 can be
P0795 • Locks in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR,
P2713 — 5GR, 6GR or 7GR —
performed C
• The shifting between the
P2722 • Manual mode is prohibited
gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be
P2731
performed
P2807 TM
• The shifting between the
gears of 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6
can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
E
• The shifting between the
• Locks in 3GR gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be
P0780 — —
• Manual mode is prohibited performed
• Manual mode is prohibited F
• Downshift when accelera- • Downshift when accelera- • Downshift when accelera-
tor pedal is depressed is tor pedal is depressed is tor pedal is depressed is
prohibited prohibited prohibited G
P1705 — • Upshift when accelerator • Upshift when accelerator • Upshift when accelerator
pedal is released is prohib- pedal is released is prohib- pedal is released is prohib-
ited ited ited
• Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited H
P1721 — — — —
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the I
gears of 2 - 3 - 4 can be
performed
• The shifting between the
• Locks in 1GR, 2GR, 3GR, • The shifting between the
gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be J
P1730 — 4GR, 5GR, 6GR or 7GR gears of 3 - 4 can be per-
performed
• Manual mode is prohibited formed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• The shifting between the
gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be
K
performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
Only the gate switch is pro- Only the gate switch is pro-
Gate switch malfunction — L
hibited hibited
P1815 Only the paddle switch is pro- Only the paddle switch is pro-
Paddle switch malfunction —
hibited hibited
Malfunction of both switches Manual mode is prohibited — Manual mode is prohibited
M

• The shifting between the • The shifting between the

gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be
Between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 — N
U0100 performed performed
U0300 • Manual mode is prohibited • Line pressure is set to the
U1000 maximum hydraulic pres-
Between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 • Fix the gear at driving sure
—
-7 • Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited O

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM : Protection Control INFOID:0000000011281095

P
The TCM becomes the protection control status temporarily to protect the safety when the safety of TCM and
transmission is lost. It automatically returns to the normal status if the safety is secured.
The TCM has the following protection control.
REVERSE INHIBIT CONTROL
Intercepts the torque transmission and shift to the neutral status if the selector lever is shifted to “R” position
while the vehicle moves forward at the vehicle speed 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more.

Revision: 2015 January TM-55 2015 Q50

 SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

Malfunction detection condition Vehicle speed: 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more

Control at malfunction Neutral
• Vehicle speed: 8 km/h (5 MPH) or less
Normal return condition and
• Engine speed: 2,200 rpm or less
• The torque transmission cannot be performed
Vehicle behavior
• There is a shock just before a vehicle stop

1ST ENGINE BRAKE PROTECTION CONTROL

Controls the engine brake so as not to make effective by turning the front brake solenoid output to OFF when
each solenoid becomes the electricity pattern of 1st engine brake during driving at the vehicle speed 25 km/h
(16 MPH) or more in any positions other than “R” position and 1GR.

• Select lever and gear: Any position other than “R” position and 1GR
Malfunction detection condition and
• Vehicle speed: More than 25 km/h (16 MPH)
Control at malfunction Front brake solenoid output signal; OFF
Normal return condition Other than detection condition of malfunction
Vehicle behavior Does not exist

TCM HIGH TEMPERATURE PROTECTION CONTROL

Limit the accelerator opening and forcibly control the vehicle to the low torque driving when the electronic sub-
strate in TCM reaches the high temperature.

TCM electronic substrate temperature

• 145°C (293°F) and 120 seconds
Malfunction detection condition
or
• 150°C (302°F)
Control at malfunction Accelerator opening: 0.5/8 or less
• TCM electronic substrate temperature: Less than 140°C (284°F)
Normal return condition and
• Vehicle speed: 5 km/h (3 MPH) or less
Vehicle behavior Accelerator opening: output torque of approximately 0.5/8

LINE PRESSURE CONTROL

LINE PRESSURE CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000011281096

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JSDIA1345GB

Revision: 2015 January TM-56 2015 Q50

 SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
DESCRIPTION
• When an engine and A/T integrated control signal (engine torque) equivalent to the engine drive force is A
transmitted from the ECM to the TCM, the TCM controls the line pressure solenoid valve.
This line pressure solenoid controls the pressure regulator valve as the signal pressure and adjusts the pres-
sure of the operating oil discharged from the oil pump to the line pressure most appropriate to the driving B
state.
• The TCM has stored in memory a number of patterns for the optimum line pressure characteristic for the
driving state.
• In order to obtain the most appropriate line pressure characteristic to meet the current driving state, the TCM C
controls the line pressure solenoid current value and thus controls the line pressure.
Normal Control
Each clutch is adjusted to the necessary pressure to match the TM
engine drive force.

PCIA0008E
G

Back-up Control (Engine Brake)

When the select operation is performed during driving and the A/T is
H
shifted down, the line pressure is set according to the vehicle speed.

PCIA0009E
K
During Shift Change
The necessary and adequate line pressure for shift change is set.
For this reason, line pressure pattern setting corresponds to engine L
torque and gearshift selection. Also, line pressure characteristic cor-
responds to engine speed, during engine brake operation.
M

PCIA0010E

Revision: 2015 January TM-57 2015 Q50

 SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
At Low Fluid Temperature
When the A/T fluid temperature drops below the prescribed tempera-
ture, in order to speed up the action of each friction element, the line
pressure is set higher than the normal line pressure characteristic.

PCIA0011E

SHIFT CHANGE CONTROL

SHIFT CHANGE CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000011281097

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JSDIA1346GB

DESCRIPTION
The clutch pressure control solenoid is controlled by the signals from the switches and sensors. Thus, the
clutch pressure is adjusted to be appropriate to the engine load state and vehicle driving state. It becomes
possible to finely control the clutch hydraulic pressure with high precision and a smoother shift change charac-
teristic is attained.

PCIA0012E

The clutch is controlled with the optimum timing and oil pressure by the engine speed, engine torque informa-
tion, etc.

Revision: 2015 January TM-58 2015 Q50

 SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Shift Change System Diagram
A

TM

PCIA0013E F
*1: Full phase real-time feedback control monitors movement of gear ratio at gear change, and controls oil
pressure in real-time to achieve the best gear ratio.
BLIPPING CONTROL G
It controls (synchronizes) engine speed to have a quick shift clutch coupling, by calculating engine speed after
downshifting and by cooperating with ASC (Adaptive Shift Control).
• “BLIPPING CONTROL” functions. H
- When downshifting by accelerator pedal depression.
- When downshifting by the manual mode.
- It works on shift-down operation by ASC at high speed side when driving at D position.
I

M
JSDIA2904GB

• TCM selects “BLIPPING CONTROL” or “NORMAL SHIFT CONTROL” according to the gear position, the
selector lever position, the engine torque and the speed when accelerating by pedal depression. N
• Engine speed control demand signal is transmitted from TCM to ECM under “BLIPPING CONTROL”.
• ECM synchronizes the engine speed according to the engine speed control demand signal.
O

Revision: 2015 January TM-59 2015 Q50

 SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Downshifting by accelerator pedal depression

JSDIA0815GB

Downshifting by the manual mode and On shift-down operation by ASC at high speed side

JSDIA0817GB

SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL

Revision: 2015 January TM-60 2015 Q50

 SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000011281098

A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM

TM

JSDIA4516GB
I
NOTE:
Paddle shifter upshift signal and paddle shifter downshift signal are applied to vehicle with paddle shifter.
DESCRIPTION J
• The TCM receives the manual mode signal, non-manual mode signal, manual mode upshift signal, manual
mode downshift signal, paddle shifter upshift signal and paddle shifter downshift signal from combination
meter via CAN communication line. The TCM shifts shift pattern control to the manual mode based on these
signals, and then shifts the A/T by operating each solenoid valve according to the shift operation of the K
driver.
NOTE:
When paddle shifter is pulled and held for approximately 60 seconds, gear shift using paddle shifter L
becomes inoperative. “P1815” is displayed in “Self Diagnostic Results” of CONSULT. In this case, paddle
shifter returns to normal status when ignition switch is turned OFF once and then ON again. Gear shift using
paddle shifter becomes operative.
• The TCM prohibits the manual mode while being in fail-safe mode due to an A/T malfunction, etc. Refer to M
TM-80, "Fail-Safe".
Manual Mode Information
N
The TCM transmits the manual mode shift refusal signal to the combination meter if the TCM refuses the
transmission from the driving status of vehicle when the selector lever or paddle shifter shifts to “UP (+ side)”
or “DOWN (− side)” side. The combination meter blinks shift indicator on the combination meter and sounds
the buzzer to indicate the driver that the shifting is not performed when receiving this signal. However, the O
TCM does not transmit the manual mode shift refusal signal in the conditions as per the following.
• When the selector lever or the paddle shifter shifts to “DOWN (− side)” side while driving in 1GR.
• When the selector lever or the paddle shifter shifts to “UP (+ side)” side while driving in 7GR. P
LOCK-UP CONTROL

Revision: 2015 January TM-61 2015 Q50

 SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
LOCK-UP CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000011281099

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JSDIA1350GB

DESCRIPTION
• The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is engaged to eliminate torque converter slip to
increase power transmission efficiency.
• Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low.
• The torque converter clutch control valve operation is controlled by the torque converter clutch solenoid
valve, which is controlled by a signal from TCM, and the torque converter clutch control valve engages or
releases the torque converter clutch piston.

JSDIA0847GB

Lock-up Operation Condition Table

Selector lever “D” position “M” position
Gear position 7 6 5 4 3 2 7 6 5 4 3 2
Lock-up × – – – – – × × × × × ×
Slip lock-up × × × × × × × × × × × ×

Lock-up released
• In the lock-up released state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the unlocked state by the
torque converter clutch solenoid and the lock-up apply pressure is drained.
in this way, the torque converter clutch piston is not coupled.
Lock-up Applied
• In the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the locked state by the
torque converter clutch solenoid and lock-up apply pressure is generated.
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is pressed and coupled.
Smooth Lock-up Control
When shifting from the lock-up released state to the lock-up applied state, the current output to the torque con-
verter clutch solenoid is controlled with the TCM. In this way, when shifting to the lock-up applied state, the
torque converter clutch is temporarily set to the half-clutched state to reduce the shock.

Revision: 2015 January TM-62 2015 Q50

 SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Half-clutched State
• The current output from the TCM to the torque converter clutch solenoid is varied to steadily increase the A
torque converter clutch solenoid pressure.
In this way, the lock-up apply pressure gradually rises and while the torque converter clutch piston is put into
half-clutched states, the torque converter clutch piston operating pressure is increased and the coupling is
completed smoothly. B

Slip Lock-up Control

• In the slip region, the torque converter clutch solenoid current is controlled with the TCM to put it into the
half-clutched state. This absorbs the engine torque fluctuation and lock-up operates from low speed. C
This raises the fuel efficiency for 2GR, 3GR, 4GR, 5GR, 6GR and 7GR.
NAVI SHIFT CONTROL
TM
NAVI SHIFT CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000011281100

SYSTEM DIRGRAM E

JSDIA4485GB

DESCRIPTION
• NAVI shift control is applied to vehicle for North America.
• NAVI shift control enables optimum engine brake by shifting the transmission gear to a lower position short
of curve when the NAVI shift control switch displayed on the navigation screen is ON.

Revision: 2015 January TM-63 2015 Q50

 SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Short of Curve
• TCM judges the size of curve by using NAVI information and TCM
selects an optimum transmission gear position.
NOTE:
When downshifting is unnecessary, current gear position may be
maintained.

JSDIA4355GB

• TCM receives NAVI information (e.g. road data signal and curve signal) from the NAVI control unit via the
display control unit. When receiving these signals, TCM transmits a NAVI shift control indication request sig-
nal to the display control unit via ECM to display the NAVI shift control switch on the navigation screen.
• TCM receives a NAVI shift control switch signal (ON/OFF) from the display control unit. TCM transmits a
NAVI shift control status signal to the display control unit according to the signal received from the display
control unit to switch NAVI shift control between ON and OFF.
NOTE:
The ON/OFF setting of NAVI shift control is maintained until the setting is changed even when the engine is
stopped.
NAVI Shift Control Operating Condition
NAVI shift control operate when all of the following conditions are satisfied. However, the control ends when
any one of the following conditions becomes insufficient during NAVI shift control.

NAVI shift control switch : ON

Shift position : D position
Infiniti Drive Mode Selector : STANDARD or SPORT
If any of the following conditions are satisfied when NAVI shift control is ON, the control may not start or func-
tion properly:
• Road shape in Map data differs from that of actual road (e.g. roads not in map, under construction, lane clo-
sure, etc.).
• Own vehicle location cannot be identified accurately (e.g. wrong recognition of road, own vehicle location
longitudinal deviation).
• A malfunction exists in a sensor equipped in the vehicle.
• Own vehicle location is hard to be identified. (e.g. existence of a road running parallel).
• Traveling at a low speed or high speed: slower/faster than a certain speed.
• GPS waves cannot be received.
• Communication error among TCM, ECM, and display control unit (CAN communication).
• Communication error between display control unit and NAVI control unit.
Fail-safe
When an error occurs in the system while NAVI shift control is ON, the NAVI shift control switch on the naviga-
tion screen cannot be selected and NAVI shift control is turned OFF.
Infiniti Drive Mode Selector

Revision: 2015 January TM-64 2015 Q50

 SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Infiniti Drive Mode Selector : System Description INFOID:0000000011281101

A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM

TM

JSDIA4489GB
L
DESCRIPTION
• TCM receives drive mode signal from chassis control module via CAN communication.
• TCM transmits recognized mode and gear shift line select result to ECM via CAN communication (by drive M
mode select signal and shift schedule signal).
• Drive mode may not actually be shifted because of CAN communication malfunction or other causes,
although display on combination meter may indicate that shifting of drive mode is complete by operation of
drive mode select switch. N
• Priority is given to manual mode, when manual mode is selected by operation of selector lever while driving
in any other drive mode status.
• Refer to DMS-7, "Infiniti Drive Mode Selector : System Description" for detailed control of infinity drive mode O
selector.
ECO mode
• Driving characteristic is controlled (for decreasing needless acceleration and deceleration and reducing P
energy consumption), so that driving that improves operational fuel efficiency is assisted.
• For gear shift vehicle speed, refer to TM-332, "Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs".
SPORT mode
• This mode uses a shift schedule (gear shift line) that mainly utilizes the high engine speed zone and
improves the driving control characteristic and response. This assists driving that is similar to driving a sports
car.

Revision: 2015 January TM-65 2015 Q50

 SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
ASC (Adaptive Shift Control)
• When driving on an up/down slope
ASC judges up/down slope according to engine torque data transmitted from the ECM and vehicle speed.
Fixing at 4GR, 5GR or 6GR on an up-slope prevents shift hunting and controls the vehicle to gain optimum
driving force.
• When driving on a curve
TCM receives the side G sensor signal from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). It locks to 4GR,
5GR or 6GR position in moderate cornering or to 3GR position in sharp cornering based on this signal. This
prevents any upshift and kickdown during cornering, maintaining smooth vehicle travel.

JSDIA1362GB

Fail-safe
If a malfunction occurs in CAN communication between TCM and chassis control module, driving mode is
maintained for approximately 30 seconds to the mode that is applied when the malfunction occurs. The mode
then returns to STANDARD mode when accelerator pedal is released.
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER)
INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : Shift Position Indicator
INFOID:0000000011281102

PURPOSE
The shift position indicator displays the shift position of transmission.
SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JSDIA4500GB

NOTE:
Paddle shifter is applied to vehicle with paddle shifter.
SIGNAL PATH

Revision: 2015 January TM-66 2015 Q50

 SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
• The TCM judges the shift position by the transmission range switch signal, manual mode switch signal, non-
manual mode switch signal, manual mode upshift signal, manual mode downshift signal, paddle shifter A
upshift signal, and paddle shifter downshift signal.
• The TCM transmits the shift position signal to the combination meter via CAN communication. The combina-
tion meter shows the shift position indicator on the information display, according to the signal.
B
LIGHTING CONDITION
Ignition switch: ON
SHUTOFF CONDITION C
Ignition switch: Other than ON
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST
TM
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning/Indicator (On Information Display)
INFOID:0000000011281103

Item Reference
Refer to TM-66, "INFORMATION DISPLAY (COMBINATION METER) : Shift Position
Shift position indicator F
Indicator".

Revision: 2015 January TM-67 2015 Q50

 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
Diagnosis Description INFOID:0000000011281104

The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems.

The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD) performed by the TCM in combination with
the ECM. A malfunction is indicated by the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) and is stored as a DTC in the
ECM memory and in the TCM memory.
The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the TCM. A malfunction history is stored in the
TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD self-diagnostic items. For details, refer to TM-84,
"DTC Index".
OBD FUNCTION
The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD) functions for the A/T system.
One function is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is
sent to the ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part.
The other function is to indicate a diagnostic result by means of the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) on the
instrument panel. Sensors, switches and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements.
The MIL automatically illuminates in “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” when a malfunction is sensed in rela-
tion to A/T system parts. For details, refer to EC-65, "DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : 1st Trip Detection Logic
and Two Trip Detection Logic".

Revision: 2015 January TM-68 2015 Q50

 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
A
CONSULT Function INFOID:0000000011281105

APPLICATION ITEMS B

Diagnostic test mode Function

Work Support This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately. C
Self Diagnostic Results Retrieve DTC from ECU and display diagnostic items.
Data Monitor Monitor the input/output signal of the control unit in real time.
TM
DTC Work Support DTC reproduction procedure can be performed speedily and precisely.
ECU Identification Display the ECU identification number (part number etc.) of the selected system.
CALIB DATA* The calibration data status of TCM can be checked. E
*: Although “CALIB DATA” is selectable, do not use it.
SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
F
Refer to TM-84, "DTC Index".
IGN Counter
The IGN counter is indicated in Freeze frame data (FFD) and indicates the number of times that the ignition G
switch is turned ON after returning to the normal state from DTC.
• CAN malfunction
- The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now.
- The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition whenever ignition H
switch OFF → ON.
- The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39.
• Other than CAN malfunction I
- The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now.
- The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...254 → 255 after returning to the normal condition whenever ignition
switch OFF → ON.
- The number is fixed to 255 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 255. J

DATA MONITOR
NOTE: K
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

Monitored item (Unit) Remarks L

VHCL/S SE-A/T (km/h or mph) Displays the vehicle speed calculated by the TCM from the output shaft revolution.
ESTM VSP SIG (km/h or mph) Displays the vehicle speed signal received via CAN communication.
M
ACCELE POSI (0.0/8) Displays the accelerator position estimated value received via CAN communication.
THROTTLE POSI (0.0/8) Displays the throttle position received via CAN communication.
CLSD THL POS (ON/OFF) Displays the idling status signal status received via CAN communication. N
W/O THL POS (ON/OFF) Displays the kickdown condition signal status received via CAN communication.
BRAKESW (ON/OFF) Displays the reception status of stop lamp switch signal received via CAN communication.
O
GEAR Displays the current transmission gear position recognized by TCM.
ENGINE SPEED (rpm) Displays the engine speed received via CAN communication.
Displays the input speed calculated from front sun gear revolution and front carrier revo- P
INPUT SPEED (rpm)
lution.
OUTPUT REV (rpm) Displays the output speed calculated from the pulse signal of output speed sensor.
GEAR RATIO Displays the gear ratio calculated from input speed and output speed.
Displays the front sun gear revolution calculated from the pulse signal of input speed sen-
F SUN GR REV (rpm)
sor 1.

Revision: 2015 January TM-69 2015 Q50

 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Monitored item (Unit) Remarks
Displays the front carrier gear revolution calculated from the pulse signal of input speed
F CARR GR REV (rpm)
sensor 2.
ATF TEMP SE 1 (V) Displays the signal voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor.
Displays the ATF temperature of oil pan calculated from the signal voltage of A/T fluid tem-
ATF TEMP 1 (°C or °F)
perature sensor.
BATTERY VOLT (V) Displays the power supply voltage of TCM.
RANGE SW 1 (ON/OFF) Displays the operation status of transmission range switch 1.
RANGE SW 2 (ON/OFF) Displays the operation status of transmission range switch 2.
RANGE SW 3 (ON/OFF) Displays the operation status of transmission range switch 3.
RANGE SW 4 (ON/OFF) Displays the operation status of transmission range switch 4.
• Displays the reception status of 1 position switch signal received via CAN communica-
1 POSITION SW (ON/OFF) tion.
• Not mounted but displayed.
SLCT LVR POSI Displays the shift positions recognized by TCM.
• Displays the reception status of overdrive control switch signal received via CAN com-
OD CONT SW (ON/OFF) munication.
• Not mounted but displayed.
• Displays the reception status of POWER mode signal received via CAN communica-
POWERSHIFT SW (ON/OFF) tion.
• Not mounted but displayed.
• Displays whether it is the DS mode.
DS RANGE (ON/OFF)
• Not mounted but displayed.
MANU MODE SW (ON/OFF) Displays whether the selector lever is in the manual shift gate position.
NON M-MODE SW (ON/OFF) Displays whether the selector lever is in any position other than manual shift gate position.
UP SW LEVER (ON/OFF) Displays the operation status of selector lever (up switch).
DOWN SW LEVER (ON/OFF) Displays the operation status of selector lever (down switch).
SFT UP ST SW (ON/OFF) Displays the operation status of paddle shifter (up switch).
SFT DWN ST SW (ON/OFF) Displays the operation status of paddle shifter (down switch).
Displays the reception status of ASCD OD cancel request signal received via CAN com-
ASCD-OD CUT (ON/OFF)
munication.
ASCD-CRUISE (ON/OFF) Displays the reception status of ASCD operation signal received via CAN communication.
ABS SIGNAL (ON/OFF) Displays the reception status of ABS operation signal received via CAN communication.
Displays the reception status of TCS gear keep request signal received via CAN commu-
TCS GR/P KEEP (ON/OFF)
nication.
Displays whether the reception value of A/T shift schedule change demand signal re-
TCS SIGNAL 2 (ON/OFF)
ceived via CAN communication is “cold”.
Displays whether the reception value of A/T shift schedule change demand signal re-
TCS SIGNAL 1 (ON/OFF)
ceived via CAN communication is “warm”.
TCC SOLENOID (A) Displays the command current from TCM to the torque converter clutch solenoid.
LINE PRES SOL (A) Displays the command current from TCM to the line pressure solenoid.
L/B SOLENOID (A) Displays the command current from TCM to the low brake solenoid.
FR/B SOLENOID (A) Displays the command current from TCM to the front brake solenoid.
HLR/C SOL (A) Displays the command current from TCM to the high and low reverse clutch solenoid.
I/C SOLENOID (A) Displays the command current from TCM to the input clutch solenoid.
D/C SOLENOID (A) Displays the command current from TCM to the direct clutch solenoid.
2346/B SOL (A) Displays the command current from TCM to the 2346 brake solenoid.
ON OFF SOL (ON/OFF) Displays the command status from TCM to anti-interlock solenoid.
Monitors the command current from TCM to the torque converter clutch solenoid, and dis-
TCC SOL MON (A)
plays the monitor value.

Revision: 2015 January TM-70 2015 Q50

 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Monitored item (Unit) Remarks
A
Monitors the command current from TCM to the line pressure solenoid, and displays the
L/P SOL MON (A)
monitor value.
Monitors the command current from TCM to the low brake solenoid, and displays the mon-
L/B SOL MON (A) B
itor value.
Monitors the command current from TCM to the front brake solenoid, and displays the
FR/B SOL MON (A)
monitor value.
Monitors the command current from TCM to the high and low reverse clutch solenoid, and C
HLR/C SOL MON (A)
displays the monitor value.
Monitors the command current from TCM to the input clutch solenoid, and displays the
I/C SOL MON (A)
monitor value. TM
Monitors the command current from TCM to the direct clutch solenoid, and displays the
D/C SOL MON (A)
monitor value.
Monitors the command current from TCM to the 2346 brake solenoid, and displays the E
2346/B SOL MON (A)
monitor value.
Monitors the command value from TCM to the anti-interlock solenoid, and displays the
ON OFF SOL MON (ON/OFF)
monitor status. F
Displays the transmission value of shift position signal transmitted via CAN communica-
SHIFT IND SIGNAL
tion.
Displays the transmission status of manual mode signal transmitted via CAN communica- G
MANU MODE IND (ON/OFF)
tion.
• Displays the transmission status of ATF temperature signal transmitted via CAN com-
ATF WARN LAMP (ON/OFF) munication. H
• Not mounted but displayed.
Displays the target oil pressure value of torque converter clutch solenoid valve calculated
TRGT PRES TCC (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) by the oil pressure calculation process of shift change control.
I
2 Displays the target oil pressure value of torque converter clutch solenoid valve calculated
TRGT PRES L/P (kPa, kg/cm or psi) by the oil pressure calculation process of lock-up control.
Displays the target oil pressure value of low brake solenoid valve calculated by the oil J
TRGT PRES L/B (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) pressure calculation process of shift change control.
Displays the target oil pressure value of front brake solenoid valve calculated by the oil
TRGT PRE FR/B (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) pressure calculation process of shift change control.
K
2 Displays the target oil pressure value of high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve calcu-
TRG PRE HLR/C (kPa, kg/cm or psi) lated by the oil pressure calculation process of shift change control.
Displays the target oil pressure value of input clutch solenoid valve calculated by the oil
TRGT PRES I/C (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) L
pressure calculation process of shift change control.
Displays the target oil pressure value of direct clutch solenoid valve calculated by the oil
TRGT PRES D/C (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) pressure calculation process of shift change control.
M
Displays the target oil pressure value of 2346 brake solenoid valve calculated by the oil
TRG PRE 2346/B (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) pressure calculation process of shift change control.
SHIFT PATTERN Displays the gear change data using the shift pattern control.
N
DRV CST JUDGE (DRIVE/COAST) Displays the judgment results of “driving” or “coasting” judged by TCM.
Displays the target gear position of gear change that is calculated based on the vehicle
NEXT GR POSI
speed information and throttle information.
O
SHIFT MODE Displays the transmission driving mode recognized by TCM.
ENGINE TORQUE (Nm) Displays the engine torque estimated value received via CAN communication.
Displays the input torque using for the oil pressure calculation process of shift change con- P
INPUT TRQ S (Nm)
trol.
Displays the input torque using for the oil pressure calculation process of line pressure
INPUT TRQ L/P (Nm)
control.
VEHICLE SPEED (km/h or mph) Displays the vehicle speed for control using the control of TCM.
Displays whether the identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the related parts of low
LOW/B PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL)
brake.

Revision: 2015 January TM-71 2015 Q50

 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Monitored item (Unit) Remarks
Displays whether the identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the related parts of
HC/IC/FRB PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL)
high and low reversed clutch, input clutch or front brake.
Displays whether the identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the related parts of in-
IC/FRB PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL)
put clutch or front brake.
Displays whether the identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the related parts of
HLR/C PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL)
high and low reversed clutch.
Displays whether the identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the related parts of di-
D/C PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL)
rect clutch.
Displays whether the identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the related parts of
FR/B PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL)
front brake.
Displays whether the identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the related parts of
2346/B PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL)
2346 brake.
Displays whether the identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the related parts of
2346B/DC PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL)
2346 brake or direct clutch.
SPORT MODE
STANDARD MODE
Displays the status of drive mode select switch signal received via CAN communication.
ECO MODE
SNOW MODE
DRIVE MODE
Displays the drive mode status recognized by TCM.
STATS
• Displays the reception status of tow mode switch signal received via CAN communica-
TOW MODE SW (ON/OFF) tion.
• Not mounted but displayed.
SHIFT SCHEDULE Displays the shift schedule selected by TCM.
TC SLIP SPEED (rpm) Displays the revolution difference between input speed and engine speed.
Displays the ATF temperature estimated value of torque converter outlet calculated from
ATF TEMP 2 (°C or °F)
the signal voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor.
Displays the engine torque estimated value reflected the requested torque of each control
ENG TORQUE D (Nm)
unit received via CAN communication.
STARTER RELAY (ON/OFF) Displays the command status from TCM to starter relay.
Displays the transmission status of A/T CHECK indicator lamp signal transmitted via CAN
F-SAFE IND/L (ON/OFF)
communication.
Monitors the command value from TCM to the starter relay, and displays the monitor sta-
START RLY MON (ON/OFF)
tus.
N IDLE STATUS (ON/OFF) Displays the control status of idle neutral control.
Displays the inclination angle calculated by the decel G sensor signal received via CAN
G SEN SLOPE (%)
communication.

DTC WORK SUPPORT

Revision: 2015 January TM-72 2015 Q50

 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Item name Description Check item
A
Following items for “1GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed.
1ST GR FNCTN P0731 • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) • Input clutch solenoid
valve B
Following items for “2GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed.
• Front brake solenoid
2ND GR FNCTN P0732 • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
valve
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG)
• Direct clutch solenoid
Following items for “3GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed. valve C
3RD GR FNCTN P0733 • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) • High and low reverse
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) clutch solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid
Following items for “4GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed. TM
valve
4TH GR FNCTN P0734 • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
• 2346 brake solenoid
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG)
valve
Following items for “5GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed. • Anti-interlock sole-
5TH GR FNCTN P0735 • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) noid valve E
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) • Each clutch and brake
• Output speed sensor
Following items for “6GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed.
• Input speed sensor 1,
6TH GR FNCTN P0729 • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
2
F
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG)
• Hydraulic control cir-
Following items for “7GR incorrect ratio” can be confirmed. cuit
7TH GR FNCTN P1734 • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) G
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG)
• Harness or connec-
tors
• Torque converter H
Following items for “TCC solenoid function” can be confirmed. clutch solenoid valve
TCC SOL FUNCTN CHECK • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) • Torque converter
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) • Input speed sensor 1,
I
2
• Hydraulic control cir-
cuit
J

Revision: 2015 January TM-73 2015 Q50

 TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION

TCM
Reference Value INFOID:0000000011281106

VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL

• The CONSULT electrically displays shift timing and lock-up timing (that is, operation timing of each sole-
noid).
Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the CONSULT display. If the difference is notice-
able, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning. Check mechanical parts in
accordance with the specified diagnostic procedures.
• Shift schedule (that implies gear position) on CONSULT may slightly differ from that is described in Service
Manual. This occurs because of the reasons as per the following:
- Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance
- Shift schedule in Service Manual refers to the point where shifting starts
- Gear position on CONSULT indicates the point where shifting completes
• Display of solenoid valves on CONSULT changes at the start of shifting, while gear position is displayed
upon completion of shifting (which is computed by TCM).
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.

Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.)

Approximately equals the speed-
VHCL/S SE-A/T During driving
ometer reading.
Approximately equals the speed-
ESTM VSP SIG During driving
ometer reading.
Accelerator pedal is released 0.0/8
ACCELE POSI
Accelerator pedal is fully depressed 8.0/8
Accelerator pedal is released 0.0/8
THROTTLE POSI
Accelerator pedal is fully depressed 8.0/8
Accelerator pedal is released ON
CLSD THL POS
Accelerator pedal is fully depressed OFF
Accelerator pedal is fully depressed ON
W/O THL POS
Accelerator pedal is released OFF
Brake pedal is depressed ON
BRAKESW
Brake pedal is released OFF
GEAR During driving 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Closely equals the tachometer
ENGINE SPEED Engine running
reading.
Approximately equals the engine
INPUT SPEED During driving (lock-up ON)
speed.
OUTPUT REV During driving (lock-up ON) Tachometer / Gear ratio
Driving with 1GR 4.783
Driving with 2GR 3.103
Driving with 3GR 1.984
GEAR RATIO Driving with 4GR 1.371
Driving with 5GR 1.000
Driving with 6GR 0.871
Driving with 7GR 0.776

Revision: 2015 January TM-74 2015 Q50

 TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.)
A
Revolution of front sun gear is indi-
F SUN GR REV During driving
cated.
Revolution of front carrier is indi-
F CARR GR REV During driving B
cated.
ATF TEMP SE 1 0°C (32° F) – 20°C (68°F) – 80°C (176°F) 3.3 – 2.7 – 0.9 V
Temperature of ATF in the oil pan is
ATF TEMP 1 Ignition switch ON C
indicated.
BATTERY VOLT Ignition switch ON Battery voltage (11 V – 14 V)
Selector lever in “P” position ON
RANGE SW 1 TM
Other than the above OFF
Selector lever in “P” and “R” positions ON
RANGE SW 2
Other than the above OFF E
Selector lever in “P”, “R” and “N” positions ON
RANGE SW 3
Other than the above OFF
F
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions ON
RANGE SW 4
Other than the above OFF
Selector lever in “1” position ON G
1 POSITION SW*
Other than the above OFF
Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions N/P
H
Selector lever in “R” position R
Selector lever in “D” position
D
Selector lever in “M” position: 7GR I
Selector lever in “M” position: 6GR 6
SLCT LVR POSI
Selector lever in “M” position: 5GR 5
J
Selector lever in “M” position: 4GR 4
Selector lever in “M” position: 3GR 3
Selector lever in “M” position: 2GR 2 K
Selector lever in “M” position: 1GR 1
When overdrive control switch is depressed ON
OD CONT SW*
When overdrive control switch is released OFF L
Power mode ON
POWERSHIFT SW*
Other than the above OFF
M
Driving with DS mode ON
DS RANGE*
Other than the above OFF
Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side ON N
MANU MODE SW
Other than the above OFF
Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side OFF
NON M-MODE SW O
Other than the above ON
Selector lever is shifted to + side ON
UP SW LEVER
Other than the above OFF P
Selector lever is shifted to − side ON
DOWN SW LEVER
Other than the above OFF
Paddle shifter (shift-up) is pulled ON
SFT UP ST SW
Other than the above OFF

Revision: 2015 January TM-75 2015 Q50

 TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.)
Paddle shifter (shift-down) is pulled ON
SFT DWN ST SW
Other than the above OFF
When TCM receives ASCD OD cancel request signal ON
ASCD-OD CUT
Other than the above OFF
ASCD operate ON
ASCD-CRUISE
Other than the above OFF
ABS operate ON
ABS SIGNAL
Other than the above OFF
When TCM receives TCS gear keep request signal ON
TCS GR/P KEEP
Other than the above OFF
When the reception value of A/T shift schedule change
ON
TCS SIGNAL 2 demand signal is “cold”
Other than the above OFF
When the reception value of A/T shift schedule change
ON
TCS SIGNAL 1 demand signal is “warm”
Other than the above OFF
TCC SOLENOID — —
LINE PRES SOL — —
L/B SOLENOID — —
FR/B SOLENOID — —
HLR/C SOL — —
I/C SOLENOID — —
D/C SOLENOID — —
2346/B SOL — —
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions
ON
ON OFF SOL Driving with 1GR to 3GR
Other than the above OFF
TCC SOL MON — —
L/P SOL MON — —
L/B SOL MON — —
FR/B SOL MON — —
HLR/C SOL MON — —
I/C SOL MON — —
D/C SOL MON — —
2346/B SOL MON — —
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions
ON
ON OFF SOL MON Driving with 1GR to 3GR
Other than the above OFF

Revision: 2015 January TM-76 2015 Q50

 TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.)
A
When the selector lever is positioned in between each po-
OFF
sition.
Selector lever in “P” position P
B
Selector lever in “R” position R
Selector lever in “N” position N
Selector lever in “D” position C
D
Selector lever in “D” position: 7GR
Selector lever in “D” position: 6GR 6
TM
Selector lever in “D” position: 5GR 5
Selector lever in “D” position: 4GR 4
SHIFT IND SIGNAL
Selector lever in “D” position: 3GR 3 E
Selector lever in “D” position: 2GR 2
Selector lever in “D” position: 1GR 1
Selector lever in “M” position: 1GR M1 F
Selector lever in “M” position: 2GR M2
Selector lever in “M” position: 3GR M3
G
Selector lever in “M” position: 4GR M4
Selector lever in “M” position: 5GR M5
Selector lever in “M” position: 6GR M6 H
Selector lever in “M” position: 7GR M7
Driving with manual mode ON
MANU MODE IND I
Other than the above OFF
When TCM transmits the A/T fluid warning lamp signal ON
ATF WARN LAMP*
Other than the above OFF J
Slip lock-up is active 0 – 600 kPa
TRGT PRES TCC Lock-up is active 600 kPa
K
Other than the above 0 kPa
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions 490 kPa
TRGT PRES L/P
Other than the above 490 – 1370 kPa L
Low brake is engaged 1370 kPa
TRGT PRES L/B
Low brake is disengaged 0 kPa
Front brake is engaged 1370 kPa
M
TRGT PRES FR/B
Front brake is disengaged 0 kPa
High and low reverse clutch is engaged 1370 kPa
TRG PRE HLR/C N
High and low reverse clutch is disengaged 0 kPa
Input clutch is engaged 1370 kPa
TRGT PRES I/C
Input clutch is disengaged 0 kPa O
Direct clutch is engaged 1370 kPa
TRGT PRES D/C
Direct clutch is disengaged 0 kPa
P
2346 brake is engaged 1370 kPa
TRG PRE 2346/B
2346 brake is disengaged 0 kPa
SHIFT PATTERN During normal driving (without shift changes) FF
Accelerator pedal is depressed DRIVE
DRV CST JUDGE
Accelerator pedal is released COAST
NEXT GR POSI During driving 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7

Revision: 2015 January TM-77 2015 Q50

 TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.)
Driving with the D position 0 or 3
SHIFT MODE
Driving with the manual mode 4 or 8
Changes the value according to
ENGINE TORQUE During driving
the acceleration or deceleration.
Changes the value according to
INPUT TRQ S During driving
the acceleration or deceleration.
Changes the value according to
INPUT TRQ L/P During driving
the acceleration or deceleration.
Approximately equals the speed-
VEHICLE SPEED During driving
ometer reading.
At 4GR - 5GR - 6GR shift control FAIL
LOW/B PARTS
Other than the above NOTFAIL
At 1GR - 2GR - 3GR shift control FAIL
HC/IC/FRB PARTS
Other than the above NOTFAIL
At 4GR - 5GR - 6GR shift control FAIL
IC/FRB PARTS
Other than the above NOTFAIL
At 4GR - 5GR - 6GR shift control FAIL
HLR/C PARTS
Other than the above NOTFAIL
At 1GR - 2GR shift control FAIL
D/C PARTS
Other than the above NOTFAIL
At control fixed to 1GR FAIL
FR/B PARTS
Other than the above NOTFAIL
At control fixed to 1GR FAIL
2346/B PARTS
Other than the above NOTFAIL
At 2GR - 3GR - 4GR shift control FAIL
2346B/DC PARTS
Other than the above NOTFAIL
Drive mode: SPORT mode ON
SPORT MODE
Other than the above OFF
Drive mode: STANDARD mode ON
STANDARD MODE
Other than the above OFF
Drive mode: ECO mode ON
ECO MODE
Other than the above OFF
Drive mode: SNOW mode ON
SNOW MODE
Other than the above OFF
Drive mode: SPORT mode SPORT
Drive mode: STANDARD mode STD
DRIVE MODE STATS
Drive mode: ECO mode ECO
Drive mode: SNOW mode SNOW
Tow mode ON
TOW MODE SW*
Other than the above OFF
During normal driving NORMAL
SHIFT SCHEDULE Drive mode: SPORT mode SPORT
Drive mode: ECO mode ECO
TC SLIP SPEED During driving Engine speed − Input speed
Temperature of ATF at the exit of
ATF TEMP 2 Ignition switch ON
torque converter.

Revision: 2015 January TM-78 2015 Q50

 TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.)
A
Changes the value according to
ENG TORQUE D During driving
the acceleration or deceleration.
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions ON
STARTER RELAY B
Other than the above OFF
For 2 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON ON
F-SAFE IND/L
Other than the above OFF C
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions ON
START RLY MON
Other than the above OFF
TM
Idle neutral is active ON
N IDLE STATUS
Other than the above OFF
Level road 0% E
Uphill slope Positive value (maximum 40.45%)
G SEN SLOPE
Negative value (minimum −
Downhill slope
40.45%) F
*: Not mounted but always display as OFF.
TERMINAL LAYOUT
G

J
SCIA1658E

PHYSICAL VALUES
K
Terminal
Description
(Wire color)
Condition Value (Approx.)
Input/ L
+ − Signal name
Output

1 Ignition power sup- Ignition switch ON Battery voltage

Ground Input
(GR) ply Ignition switch OFF 0V M
Battery power sup-
2
Ground ply Input Always Battery voltage
(P)
(Memory back-up)
N
3 Input/
— CAN-H — —
(L) Output
4 Input/ O
— K-line — —
(LG) Output
5
Ground Ground — Always 0V
(B)
P
6 Ignition power sup- Ignition switch ON Battery voltage
Ground Input
(GR) ply Ignition switch OFF 0V
Selector lever in “R” position. 0V
7
Ground Back-up lamp relay Input Ignition switch ON Selector lever in other than
(BG) Battery voltage
above.

Revision: 2015 January TM-79 2015 Q50

 TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color)
Condition Value (Approx.)
Input/
+ − Signal name
Output
8 Input/
— CAN-L — —
(P) Output
Selector lever in “N” and “P” po-
Battery voltage
9 sitions.
Ground Starter relay Output Ignition switch ON
(GR) Selector lever in other than
0V
above.
10
Ground Ground — Always 0V
(B)

Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000011281107

TCM has the electrical fail-safe mode. The mode is divided into a maximum of 3 phases (1st fail-safe, 2nd fail-
safe and final fail-safe) and functions so that the operation can be continued even if the signal circuit of the
main electronically controlled input/output parts is damaged.
Even if the electronic circuit is normal, the fail-safe mode may start under special conditions (such as when the
brake pedal is depressed suddenly from a hard wheel spin status to stop the rotation of wheels). In this case,
turn the ignition switch OFF and back to ON after 5 seconds to resume the normal shift pattern.
Consequently, the customer's vehicle may already return to the normal condition. Refer to TM-96, "Diagnosis
Flow".

The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
1st fail-safe
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction-
2nd fail-safe
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
Final fail-safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.

FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION

Vehicle behavior for 1st fail- Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail- Vehicle behavior for final fail-
DTC Vehicle condition
safe safe safe
P0615 — Starter is disabled — Starter is disabled
• Fixed in the “D” position • Fixed in the “D” position
(The shifting can be per- (The shifting can be per-
formed) formed)
• Lock-up is prohibited when • Lock-up is prohibited when
30 km/h (19 MPH) or less 30 km/h (19 MPH) or less
• The shifting between the • The shifting between the
gears of 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 can gears of 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 can
P0705 — be performed — be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited
• Shift position indicator is • Shift position indicator is
switched OFF switched OFF
• Starter relay is switched • Starter relay is switched
OFF (starter is disabled) OFF (starter is disabled)
• Back-up lamp is OFF • Back-up lamp is OFF
• Large shift shock • Large shift shock
• The shifting between the
gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be • The shifting between the
Between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 —
performed gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be
P0710 • Manual mode is prohibited performed
Between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 • Fix the gear while driving • Manual mode is prohibited
—
-7 • Manual mode is prohibited

Revision: 2015 January TM-80 2015 Q50

 TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Vehicle behavior for 1st fail- Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail- Vehicle behavior for final fail-
DTC Vehicle condition
safe safe safe A
• The shifting between the
gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be • The shifting between the
Between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 —
performed gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be B
P0717 • Manual mode is prohibited performed
Between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 • Fix the gear while driving • Manual mode is prohibited
—
-7 • Manual mode is prohibited
C
• Only downshift can be per-
formed
• Manual mode is prohibited
Between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 • A vehicle speed signal — TM
from the unified meter and
A/C amp. is regarded as • The shifting between the
an effective signal gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be
P0720 E
performed
• Fix the gear at driving • Manual mode is prohibited
• Manual mode is prohibited
Between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 • A vehicle speed signal
—
-7 from the unified meter and F
A/C amp. is regarded as
an effective signal
P0720 G
and — Locks in 5GR — Locks in 5GR
P1721
P0725 — — — —
H
Engine torque limit: Max 150 Engine torque limit: Max 150
Small gear ratio difference —
Nm Nm
• Locks in 1GR
I
• The shifting between the
gears of 1 - 2 can be per-
Neutral mal- formed
function be- • The shifting between the J
• Locks in 2GR, 3GR or 4GR
tween the — gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be
• Manual mode is prohibited
gears of 1 - 2 - performed
3 and 7 • The shifting between the
gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be K
performed
P0729
• Manual mode is prohibited
P0731
P0732 • Locks in 1GR L
P0733 Great gear • The shifting between the
P0734 ratio differ- gears of 1 - 2 can be per-
P0735 ence formed
P1734 • The shifting between the M
gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be
performed
• Locks in 1GR, 2GR, 3GR, • The shifting between the
• The shifting between the
Other than 4GR, 5GR or 6GR gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be N
gears of 2 - 3 - 4 can be
the above • Fix the gear while driving performed
performed
• Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited
• The shifting between the
gears of 3 - 4 can be per-
formed O
• The shifting between the
gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be
performed
P
• Manual mode is prohibited

Revision: 2015 January TM-81 2015 Q50

 TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Vehicle behavior for 1st fail- Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail- Vehicle behavior for final fail-
DTC Vehicle condition
safe safe safe
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the
• The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 can be per-
• Locks in 5GR, 6GR or 7GR gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be formed
P0730 —
• Manual mode is prohibited performed • The shifting between the
• Manual mode is prohibited gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be
performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Lock-up is prohibited • Lock-up is prohibited
P0740 — —
• Slip lock-up is prohibited • Slip lock-up is prohibited
• Lock-up is prohibited • Lock-up is prohibited
P0744 — —
• Slip lock-up is prohibited • Slip lock-up is prohibited
P0745 — — — —
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the
gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be
performed
P0750
• The shifting between the
P0775
gears of 3 - 4 - 5 can be
P0795 • Locks in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR,
performed
P2713 — 5GR, 6GR or 7GR —
• The shifting between the
P2722 • Manual mode is prohibited
gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be
P2731
performed
P2807
• The shifting between the
gears of 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6
can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• The shifting between the
• Locks in 3GR gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be
P0780 — —
• Manual mode is prohibited performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Downshift when accelera- • Downshift when accelera- • Downshift when accelera-
tor pedal is depressed is tor pedal is depressed is tor pedal is depressed is
prohibited prohibited prohibited
P1705 — • Upshift when accelerator • Upshift when accelerator • Upshift when accelerator
pedal is released is prohib- pedal is released is prohib- pedal is released is prohib-
ited ited ited
• Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited
P1721 — — — —
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the
gears of 2 - 3 - 4 can be
performed
• The shifting between the
• Locks in 1GR, 2GR, 3GR, • The shifting between the
gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be
P1730 — 4GR, 5GR, 6GR or 7GR gears of 3 - 4 can be per-
performed
• Manual mode is prohibited formed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• The shifting between the
gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be
performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
Only the gate switch is pro- Only the gate switch is pro-
Gate switch malfunction —
hibited hibited
P1815 Only the paddle switch is pro- Only the paddle switch is pro-
Paddle switch malfunction —
hibited hibited
Malfunction of both switches Manual mode is prohibited — Manual mode is prohibited

Revision: 2015 January TM-82 2015 Q50

 TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Vehicle behavior for 1st fail- Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail- Vehicle behavior for final fail-
DTC Vehicle condition
safe safe safe A
• The shifting between the • The shifting between the
gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be
Between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 —
U0100 performed performed B
U0300 • Manual mode is prohibited • Line pressure is set to the
U1000 maximum hydraulic pres-
Between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 • Fix the gear at driving sure
—
-7 • Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited C

Protection Control INFOID:0000000011281108

The TCM becomes the protection control status temporarily to protect the safety when the safety of TCM and TM
transmission is lost. It automatically returns to the normal status if the safety is secured.
The TCM has the following protection control.
REVERSE INHIBIT CONTROL E
Intercepts the torque transmission and shift to the neutral status if the selector lever is shifted to “R” position
while the vehicle moves forward at the vehicle speed 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more.
F
Malfunction detection condition Vehicle speed: 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
Control at malfunction Neutral
• Vehicle speed: 8 km/h (5 MPH) or less
G
Normal return condition and
• Engine speed: 2,200 rpm or less
• The torque transmission cannot be performed H
Vehicle behavior
• There is a shock just before a vehicle stop

1ST ENGINE BRAKE PROTECTION CONTROL

I
Controls the engine brake so as not to make effective by turning the front brake solenoid output to OFF when
each solenoid becomes the electricity pattern of 1st engine brake during driving at the vehicle speed 25 km/h
(16 MPH) or more in any positions other than “R” position and 1GR.
J
• Select lever and gear: Any position other than “R” position and 1GR
Malfunction detection condition and
• Vehicle speed: More than 25 km/h (16 MPH)
K
Control at malfunction Front brake solenoid output signal; OFF
Normal return condition Other than detection condition of malfunction
Vehicle behavior Does not exist L

TCM HIGH TEMPERATURE PROTECTION CONTROL

Limit the accelerator opening and forcibly control the vehicle to the low torque driving when the electronic sub-
M
strate in TCM reaches the high temperature.

TCM electronic substrate temperature

• 145°C (293°F) and 120 seconds N
Malfunction detection condition
or
• 150°C (302°F)
Control at malfunction Accelerator opening: 0.5/8 or less O
• TCM electronic substrate temperature: Less than 140°C (284°F)
Normal return condition and
• Vehicle speed: 5 km/h (3 MPH) or less
P
Vehicle behavior Accelerator opening: output torque of approximately 0.5/8

DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000011281109

If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the priority as per the
following list.

Revision: 2015 January TM-83 2015 Q50

 TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

Priority Detected items (DTC) Reference

U0100 LOST COMM (ECM A) TM-104, "DTC Description"
1
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT TM-107, "DTC Description"
P0615 STARTER RELAY TM-109, "DTC Description"
P0705 T/M RANGE SENSOR A TM-111, "DTC Description"
P0710 FLUID TEMP SENSOR A TM-113, "DTC Description"
P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A TM-116, "DTC Description"
P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR TM-118, "DTC Description"
P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER TM-142, "DTC Description"
P0745 PC SOLENOID A TM-146, "DTC Description"
2
P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID A TM-147, "DTC Description"
P0775 PC SOLENOID B TM-149, "DTC Description"
P0795 PC SOLENOID C TM-153, "DTC Description"
P2713 PC SOLENOID D TM-170, "DTC Description"
P2722 PC SOLENOID E TM-172, "DTC Description"
P2731 PC SOLENOID F TM-174, "DTC Description"
P2807 PC SOLENOID G TM-176, "DTC Description"
P0729 6GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-122, "DTC Description"
P0730 INCORRECT GR RATIO TM-125, "DTC Description"
P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-127, "DTC Description"
P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-130, "DTC Description"
P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-133, "DTC Description"
3 P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-136, "DTC Description"
P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-139, "DTC Description"
P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER TM-144, "DTC Description"
P0780 SHIFT TM-151, "DTC Description"
P1730 INTERLOCK TM-159, "DTC Description"
P1734 7GR INCORRECT RATIO TM-161, "DTC Description"
U0300 CAN COMM DATA TM-105, "DTC Description"
P0725 ENGINE SPEED TM-120, "DTC Description"
4 P1705 TP SENSOR TM-155, "DTC Description"
P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL TM-157, "DTC Description"
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH TM-164, "DTC Description"

DTC Index INFOID:0000000011281110

NOTE:
• If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the priority as per
the following list. Refer to TM-83, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart".
• The IGN counter is indicated in Freeze frame data (FFD). Refer to TM-69, "CONSULT Function".

DTC*1
Items
Reference
(CONSULT screen terms) MIL*2, “ENGINE” with CONSULT only “TRANS-
CONSULT or GST MISSION”
STARTER RELAY — P0615 TM-109, "DTC Description"
T/M RANGE SENSOR A P0705 P0705 TM-111, "DTC Description"
FLUID TEMP SENSOR A P0710 P0710 TM-113, "DTC Description"

Revision: 2015 January TM-84 2015 Q50

 TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

DTC*1
Items A
Reference
(CONSULT screen terms) MIL*2, “ENGINE” with CONSULT only “TRANS-
CONSULT or GST MISSION”
INPUT SPEED SENSOR A P0717 P0717 TM-116, "DTC Description" B
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR P0720 P0720 TM-118, "DTC Description"
ENGINE SPEED — P0725 TM-120, "DTC Description"
6GR INCORRECT RATIO P0729 P0729 TM-122, "DTC Description" C
INCORRECT GR RATIO P0730 P0730 TM-125, "DTC Description"
1GR INCORRECT RATIO P0731 P0731 TM-127, "DTC Description"
TM
2GR INCORRECT RATIO P0732 P0732 TM-130, "DTC Description"
3GR INCORRECT RATIO P0733 P0733 TM-133, "DTC Description"
4GR INCORRECT RATIO P0734 P0734 TM-136, "DTC Description" E
5GR INCORRECT RATIO P0735 P0735 TM-139, "DTC Description"
TORQUE CONVERTER P0740 P0740 TM-142, "DTC Description"
F
TORQUE CONVERTER P0744 P0744 TM-144, "DTC Description"
PC SOLENOID A P0745 P0745 TM-146, "DTC Description"
SHIFT SOLENOID A P0750 P0750 TM-147, "DTC Description" G
PC SOLENOID B P0775 P0775 TM-149, "DTC Description"
SHIFT P0780 P0780 TM-151, "DTC Description"
H
PC SOLENOID C P0795 P0795 TM-153, "DTC Description"
TP SENSOR — P1705 TM-155, "DTC Description"
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL — P1721 TM-157, "DTC Description" I
INTERLOCK P1730 P1730 TM-159, "DTC Description"
7GR INCORRECT RATIO P1734 P1734 TM-161, "DTC Description"
M-MODE SWITCH — P1815 TM-164, "DTC Description" J
PC SOLENOID D P2713 P2713 TM-170, "DTC Description"
PC SOLENOID E P2722 P2722 TM-172, "DTC Description"
K
PC SOLENOID F P2731 P2731 TM-174, "DTC Description"
PC SOLENOID G P2807 P2807 TM-176, "DTC Description"
LOST COMM (ECM A) U0100 U0100 TM-104, "DTC Description" L
CAN COMM DATA — U0300 TM-105, "DTC Description"
CAN COMM CIRCUIT — U1000 TM-107, "DTC Description"
M
*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
*2: Refer to EC-64, "Diagnosis Description".
N

Revision: 2015 January TM-85 2015 Q50

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01A]

WIRING DIAGRAM
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000011281111

JRDWC4134GB

Revision: 2015 January TM-86 2015 Q50

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01A]

TM

JRDWC4135GB

Revision: 2015 January TM-87 2015 Q50

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01A]

JRDWC4136GB

Revision: 2015 January TM-88 2015 Q50

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01A]

TM

JRDWC4137GB

Revision: 2015 January TM-89 2015 Q50

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01A]

JRDWC4138GB

Revision: 2015 January TM-90 2015 Q50

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01A]

TM

JRDWC4139GB

Revision: 2015 January TM-91 2015 Q50

 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01A]

JRDWC4140GB

Revision: 2015 January TM-92 2015 Q50

 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01A]
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
A
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000011281112

TM

P
JRDWC0907GB

Revision: 2015 January TM-93 2015 Q50

 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01A]

JRDWC4141GB

Revision: 2015 January TM-94 2015 Q50

 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [7AT: RE7R01A]

TM

JRDWC4142GB

Revision: 2015 January TM-95 2015 Q50

 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

BASIC INSPECTION
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Diagnosis Flow INFOID:0000000011281113

[Link] INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM

Refer to TM-97, "Question sheet" and interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions
and environment when the malfunction occurred) as much as possible when the customer brings in the vehi-
cle.

>> GO TO 2.
[Link] DTC
1. Before checking the malfunction, check whether any DTC exists.
2. If DTC exists, perform the following operations.
- Record the DTC and freeze frame data. (Print out the data using CONSULT and affix them to the Work
Order Sheet.)
- Erase DTCs.
- Check the relationship between the cause that is clarified with DTC and the malfunction information
described by the customer. TM-192, "Symptom Table" is effective.
3. Check the information of related service bulletins and others also.
Do malfunction information and DTC exist?
Malfunction information and DTC exists. >>GO TO 3.
Malfunction information exists, but no DTC. >>GO TO 4.
No malfunction information, but DTC exists. >>GO TO 5.
[Link] MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM
Check any malfunction described by a customer, except those with DTC on the vehicle.
Also investigate whether the symptom is a fail-safe or normal operation. Refer to TM-80, "Fail-Safe".
When a malfunction symptom is reproduced, the question sheet is effective. Refer to TM-97, "Question sheet".
Verify the relationship between the symptom and the conditions in which the malfunction described by the cus-
tomer occurs.

>> GO TO 5.
[Link] MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM
Check the malfunction described by the customer on the vehicle.
Also investigate whether the symptom is a fail-safe or normal operation. Refer to TM-80, "Fail-Safe".
When a malfunction symptom is reproduced, the question sheet is effective. Refer to TM-97, "Question sheet".
Verify the relationship between the symptom and the conditions in which the malfunction described by the cus-
tomer occurs.

>> GO TO 6.
[Link] “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”
Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” of the appropriate DTC to check if DTC is detected again.
Refer to TM-83, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" when multiple DTCs are detected, and then determine the
order for performing the diagnosis.
NOTE:
If no DTC is detected, refer to the freeze frame data.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Check according to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
[Link] MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM WITH “DIAGNOSIS CHART BY SYMPTOM”
Use TM-192, "Symptom Table" from the symptom inspection result in step 4. Then identify where to start per-
forming the diagnosis based on possible causes and symptoms.

Revision: 2015 January TM-96 2015 Q50

 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

>> GO TO 8. A
[Link] OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
Repair or replace the detected malfunctioning parts. B
Reconnect parts or connector after repairing or replacing, and then erase DTC if necessary.

>> GO TO 8. C
[Link] CHECK
Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” again to make sure that the repair is correctly performed.
Check that malfunctions are not reproduced when obtaining the malfunction information from the customer, TM
referring to the symptom inspection result in step 3 or 4.
Is DTC or malfunction symptom reproduced?
YES-1 >> DTC is reproduced: GO TO 5. E
YES-2 >> Malfunction symptom is reproduced: GO TO 6.
NO >> Before delivering the vehicle to the customer, make sure that DTC is erased.
F
Question sheet INFOID:0000000011281114

DESCRIPTION
G
There are many operating conditions that may cause a malfunction
of the transmission parts. By understanding those conditions prop-
erly, a quick and exact diagnosis can be achieved.
In general, customers have their own criteria for a problem. There- H
fore, it is important to understand the symptom and status well
enough by asking the customer about the concerns carefully. In
order to systemize all the information for the diagnosis, prepare the I
question sheet referring to the question points.

J
SEF907L

WORKSHEET SAMPLE
K
Question Sheet
Customer name MR/MS Engine # Manuf. Date
Incident Date VIN L
Model & Year In Service Date
Trans. Mileage km / Mile
M
Symptoms † Vehicle does not move († Any position † Particular position )
† No upshift († 1GR → 2GR † 2GR → 3GR † 3GR → 4GR † 4GR → 5GR † 5GR →
6GR † 6GR → 7GR)
N
† No downshift († 7GR → 6GR † 6GR → 5GR † 5GR → 4GR † 4GR → 3GR † 3GR →
2GR † 2GR → 1GR)
† Lock-up malfunction O
† Shift point too high or too low
† Shift shock or slip
† Noise or vibration P
† No kick down
† No pattern select
† Others

Frequency † All the time † Under certain conditions † Sometimes ( times a day)

Revision: 2015 January TM-97 2015 Q50

 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Question Sheet
Weather conditions † Not affected
Weather † Fine † Clouding † Raining † Snowing † Other ( )
† Temp. [Approx. °C (
Temp. † Hot † Warm † Cool † Cold
°F)]
Humidity † High † Middle † Low
Transmission conditions † Not affected
† Cold † During warm-up † After warm-up
† Engine speed ( rpm)
Road conditions † Not affected
† In town † In suburbs † Freeway † Off road (Up / Down)
Driving conditions † Not affected
† While cruis-
† At starting † While idling † While engine racing † At racing
ing
† While accelerating † While decelerating † While turning (Right / Left)
† Vehicle speed [ km/h ( MPH)]
Other conditions

Revision: 2015 January TM-98 2015 Q50

 A/T FLUID COOLER
< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
A/T FLUID COOLER
A
Cleaning INFOID:0000000011281115

Whenever a transmission is replaced, the A/T fluid cooler mounted in the radiator must be inspected and B
cleaned.
Metal debris and friction material, if present, can become trapped in the A/T fluid cooler. This debris can con-
taminate the newly serviced transmission or, in severe cases, can block or restrict the flow of ATF. In either
case, malfunction of the newly serviced transmission may result. C
Debris, if present, may build up as ATF enters the cooler inlet. It will be necessary to back flush the cooler
through the cooler outlet in order to flush out any built up debris.
CLEANING PROCEDURE TM
1. Position an oil pan under the transmission inlet and outlet cooler hoses.
2. Identify the inlet and outlet fluid cooler hoses. E
3. Disconnect the A/T fluid cooler inlet and outlet rubber hoses
from the steel cooler tubes or by-pass valve.
NOTE:
Replace the cooler hoses if rubber material from the hose F
remains on the tube fitting.
4. Allow any ATF that remains in the cooler hoses to drain into the
oil pan. G

H
JPDIA0711GB

5. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission I

Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler out-
let hose.
CAUTION:
• Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the J
Transmission Cooler Cleaner.
• Spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner only with adequate
ventilation. K
• Avoid contact with eyes and skin.
• Never breath vapors or spray mist.
6. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmis- JPDIA0712GB L
sion Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet
hose until ATF flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds.
7. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose.
M
8. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and of the cooler outlet
hose.
9. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 to 9 kg/cm2 (71 to 128 psi) N
through the cooler outlet hose for 10 seconds to force out any
remaining ATF.
10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 three additional times. O
11. Position an oil pan under the banjo bolts that connect the A/T
fluid cooler steel lines to the transmission.
12. Remove the banjo bolts. JPDIA0713GB
P
13. Flush each steel line from the cooler side back toward the trans-
mission by spraying Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream for 5 seconds.
14. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 to 9 kg/cm2 (71 to 128 psi) through each steel line from the cooler
side back toward the transmission for 10 seconds to force out any remaining ATF.
15. Ensure all debris is removed from the steel cooler lines.
16. Ensure all debris is removed from the banjo bolts and fittings.

Revision: 2015 January TM-99 2015 Q50

 A/T FLUID COOLER
< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
17. Perform “DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE”.
DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Insufficient cleaning of the cooler inlet hose exterior may lead to inaccurate debris identification.
1. Position an oil pan under the transmission inlet and outlet cooler hoses.
2. Clean the exterior and tip of the cooler inlet hose.
3. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission
Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler out-
let hose.
CAUTION:
• Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the
Transmission Cooler Cleaner.
• Spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner only with adequate
ventilation.
• Avoid contact with eyes and skin.
• Never breath vapors or spray mist.
4. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmis- JPDIA0712GB
sion Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet
hose until ATF flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds.
5. Tie a common white, basket-type coffee filter to the end of the
cooler inlet hose.

JPDIA0714GB

6. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose.
7. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of cooler outlet
hose.
8. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 to 9 kg/cm2 (71 to 128 psi)
through the cooler outlet hose to force any remaining ATF into
the coffee filter.
9. Remove the coffee filter from the end of the cooler inlet hose.
10. Perform “INSPECTION PROCEDURE”.

JPDIA0715GB

INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. Inspect the coffee filter for debris.
a. If small metal debris less than 1 mm (0.040 in) in size or metal
powder is found in the coffee filter, this is normal. If normal
debris is found, the A/T fluid cooler/radiator can be re-used and
the procedure is ended.

SCIA2967E

Revision: 2015 January TM-100 2015 Q50

 A/T FLUID COOLER
< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
b. If one or more pieces of debris are found that are over 1 mm
(0.040 in) in size and/or peeled clutch facing material is found in A
the coffee filter, the A/T fluid cooler is not serviceable. The A/T
fluid cooler/radiator must be replaced and the inspection proce-
dure is ended. Refer to CO-15, "Exploded View".
B

SCIA7031E

TM
Inspection INFOID:0000000011281116

After performing all procedures, ensure that all remaining oil is cleaned from all components.
E

Revision: 2015 January TM-101 2015 Q50

 STALL TEST
< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
STALL TEST
Inspection and Judgment INFOID:0000000011281117

INSPECTION
1. Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary.
2. Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the A/T fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to
176°F). Inspect the amount of ATF. Replenish if necessary.
3. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn.
4. Start the engine, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in “D” position.
5. Gradually press down the accelerator pedal while holding down the foot brake.
6. Quickly read off the stall speed, and quickly release the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION:
Never hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds during this test.

Stall speed : Refer to TM-333, "Stall Speed".

7. Shift the selector lever to “N” position.
8. Cool down the ATF.
CAUTION:
Run the engine at idle for at least 1 minute.
9. Repeat steps 5 through 8 with selector lever in “R” position.
JUDGMENT OF STALL TEST

Selector lever position

Possible location of malfunction
“D” and “M” “R”
• Low brake
H O • 1st one-way clutch
• 2nd one-way clutch
• Reverse brake
Stall speed O H • 1st one-way clutch
• 2nd one-way clutch
L L • Engine and torque converter one-way clutch
H H • Line pressure low
O: Stall speed within standard value position
H: Stall speed higher than standard value
L: Stall speed lower than standard value
Stall test standard value position
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 1 → 2 Slipping in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR or 6GR 2346 brake slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 2 → 3 Slipping in 3GR, 4GR or 5GR Direct clutch slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 3 → 4 Slipping in 4GR, 5GR, 6GR or 7GR High and low reverse clutch slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 4 → 5 Slipping in 5GR, 6GR or 7GR Input clutch slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 5 → 6 Slipping in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR or 6GR 2346 brake slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 6 → 7 Slipping in 7GR Front brake slippage

Revision: 2015 January TM-102 2015 Q50

 A/T POSITION
< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
A/T POSITION
A
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000011281118

INSPECTION B
1. Place selector lever in “P” position, and turn ignition switch ON (engine stop).
2. Check that selector lever can be shifted to other than “P” position when brake pedal is depressed. Also
check that selector lever can be shifted from “P” position only when brake pedal is depressed. C
3. Shift the selector lever and check for excessive effort, sticking, noise or rattle.
4. Confirm that the selector lever stops at each position by feeling the engagement when it is moved through
all the positions. Check whether or not the actual position the selector lever matches the position shown TM
by the shift position indicator and the A/T body.
5. The method of operating the lever to individual positions cor-
rectly is shown in the figure. E
6. When selector button is pressed in “P”, “R”, or “N” position with-
out applying forward/backward force to selector lever, check but-
ton operation for sticking. F
7. Confirm that the back-up lamps illuminate only when lever is
placed in the “R” position. Confirm that the back-up lamps do not
illuminate when selector lever is pushed against “R” position in G
the “P” or “N” position.
8. Confirm that the engine can only be started with the selector
lever in the “P” and “N” positions. (With selector lever in the “P” JSDIA0790GB
H
position, engine can be started even when selector lever is
moved forward and backward.)
9. Make sure that A/T is locked completely in “P” position.
I
10. When the selector lever is shifted to the manual shift gate, manual mode should be indicated on the com-
bination meter.
In addition, a set shift position must be changed when the selector lever is shifted to the “+” or “−” side in
the manual mode. (Only while driving.) J
ADJUSTMENT
1. Place manual lever and selector lever in “P” position. K
2. Loosen nut ( ).

: 2WD models L
: AWD models
: Vehicle front
M
3. While pressing lower lever toward rear of vehicle (in “P” posi-
tion direction), tighten nut to specified torque. Refer to TM-205,
"Exploded View".
CAUTION: N
Be careful not to touch the control rod while pressing
lower lever of A/T shift selector assembly.
NOTE: O
Press lower lever of A/T shift selector assembly with a force of
9.8 N (approximately 1 kg, 2.2 lb).
P

JSDIA4514ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-103 2015 Q50

 U0100 LOST COMMUNICATION (ECM A)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
U0100 LOST COMMUNICATION (ECM A)
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011281119

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
LOST COMM (ECM A) When the ignition switch is ON, TCM is unable to receive the CAN communi-
U0100
(Lost Communication With ECM/PCM A) cations signal from ECM continuously for 2 seconds or more.

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• ECM
• Harness or connector
(CAN communication line is open or shorted)
FAIL-SAFE

The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
1st fail-safe
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction-
2nd fail-safe
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
Final fail-safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.

Vehicle behavior for 1st fail- Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail- Vehicle behavior for final fail-
Vehicle condition
safe safe safe
• The shifting between the • The shifting between the
gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be per- gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be per-
Between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 —
formed formed
• Manual mode is prohibited • Line pressure is set to the
• Fix the gear at driving maximum hydraulic pressure
Between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 — • Manual mode is prohibited
• Manual mode is prohibited

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

[Link] BEFORE WORK
If another “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
[Link] DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine and wait for at least 5 seconds.
2. Check DTC.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT”.
Is “U0100” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-104, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281120

For the diagnosis procedure, refer to LAN-24, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".

Revision: 2015 January TM-104 2015 Q50

 U0300 CAN COMMUNICATION DATA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
U0300 CAN COMMUNICATION DATA
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011281121

The amount of data transmitted from each control unit is read. B

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms C

DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
CAN COMM DATA
When the amount of data transmitted from each control unit is smaller than the
U0300 (Internal Control Module Software Incom- TM
specified amount.
patibility)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
Control units other than TCM E

FAIL-SAFE
F
The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
1st fail-safe
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction-
2nd fail-safe G
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
Final fail-safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control. H

Vehicle behavior for 1st fail- Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail- Vehicle behavior for final fail-
Vehicle condition
safe safe safe I
• The shifting between the • The shifting between the
gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be per- gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be per-
Between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 —
formed formed J
• Manual mode is prohibited • Line pressure is set to the
• Fix the gear at driving maximum hydraulic pressure
Between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 — • Manual mode is prohibited
• Manual mode is prohibited
K
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
[Link]
L
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

M
>> GO TO 2.
[Link] DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT N
1. Start the engine and wait for 2 seconds or more.
2. Check DTC.
Is “U0300” detected? O
YES >> Go to TM-105, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END P
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281122

[Link] CONTROL UNIT

Check the number of control units replaced before detecting “U0300”.
Is the number of replaced control units one?

Revision: 2015 January TM-105 2015 Q50

 U0300 CAN COMMUNICATION DATA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
YES >> Since the replaced control unit may be out of specifications, check the part number and specifica-
tions.
NO >> GO TO 2.
[Link] CONTROL UNIT
With CONSULT
1. Remove one of the replaced control units.
2. Install the previous control unit mounted before replacement.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 2 seconds or more.
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “U0300” detected?
YES >> Turn OFF the ignition switch to check the other control units in the same method.
NO >> Since the removed control unit may be out of specifications, check the part number and specifica-
tions.

Revision: 2015 January TM-106 2015 Q50

 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011281123

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle mul- B
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability.
Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links
with other control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are con-
nected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission C
with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
TM
CONSULT screen terms
DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
CAN COMM CIRCUIT TCM cannot transmit or receive CAN communication signals continuously for
E
U1000
(CAN Communication Line) 2 seconds or more when the ignition switch is ON.

POSSIBLE CAUSE F
• TCM
• Harness or connector
(CAN communication line is open or shorted)
G
FAIL-SAFE

The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to H
1st fail-safe
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction-
2nd fail-safe
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
I
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
Final fail-safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.
J
Vehicle behavior for 1st fail- Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail- Vehicle behavior for final fail-
Vehicle condition
safe safe safe
• The shifting between the K
• The shifting between the
gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be per- gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be per-
Between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 —
formed formed
• Manual mode is prohibited • Line pressure is set to the L
• Fix the gear at driving maximum hydraulic pressure
Between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 — • Manual mode is prohibited
• Manual mode is prohibited

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE M

[Link]
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at N
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2. O
[Link] DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
P
1. Start the engine.
2. Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
3. Check DTC.
Is “U1000” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-108, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END

Revision: 2015 January TM-107 2015 Q50

 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281124

Go to LAN-24, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".

Revision: 2015 January TM-108 2015 Q50

 P0615 STARTER RELAY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0615 STARTER RELAY
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011281125

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
STARTER RELAY The starter monitor value is OFF when the ignition switch is ON at the “P” and
P0615
(Starter Relay Circuit) “N” positions.

POSSIBLE CAUSE TM
• Harness or connector
(Starter relay and TCM circuit is open or shorted)
• Starter relay circuit E
FAIL-SAFE

The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to F
1st fail-safe
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction-
2nd fail-safe
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured. G
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
Final fail-safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control. H

Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe
Starter is disabled — Starter is disabled I

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

[Link] J
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
K
>> GO TO 2.
[Link] DTC DETECTION L
With CONSULT
1. Shift the selector lever to “P” and “N” positions.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 2 seconds or more. M
3. Check DTC.
Is “P0615” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-109, "Diagnosis Procedure". N
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281126 O

[Link] STARTER RELAY SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. P
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and ground.

Revision: 2015 January TM-109 2015 Q50

 P0615 STARTER RELAY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

+
IPDM E/R − Condition Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions. Battery voltage
E121 37 Ground
Selector lever in other positions. 0V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check starter relay circuit. Refer to STR-6, "Wiring Diagram".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T ASSEMBLY AND IPDM E/R
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector.
3. Check the continuity between A/T assembly harness connector terminal and IPDM E/R harness connec-
tor terminal.

A/T assembly IPDM E/R

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
F2 9 E121 37 Existed
4. Also check short circuit in harness.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] JOINT CONNECTOR
1. Remove joint connector. Refer to TM-215, "Exploded View".
2. Check the continuity between joint connector terminals.

A/T assembly harness connector side TCM harness connector side

Continuity
Terminal Terminal
9 9 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace control valve & TCM. Refer to TM-216, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2015 January TM-110 2015 Q50

 P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR A
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR A
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011281127

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
T/M RANGE SENSOR A
The TCM detects an ON/OFF combination pattern other than that of the trans-
P0705 [Transmission Range Sensor A Circuit
mission range switches 1, 2, 3 and 4.
(PRNDL Input)]
TM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connector
(Transmission range switches 1, 2, 3, 4 and TCM circuit is open or shorted) E
• Transmission range switches 1, 2, 3 and 4
FAIL-SAFE
F
The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
1st fail-safe
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction- G
2nd fail-safe
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
Final fail-safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving. H
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.

Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe
I
• Fixed in the “D” position (The shifting • Fixed in the “D” position (The shifting can
can be performed) be performed)
• Lock-up is prohibited when 30 km/h (19 • Lock-up is prohibited when 30 km/h (19
MPH) or less MPH) or less J
• The shifting between the gears of 3 - 4 - • The shifting between the gears of 3 - 4 -
5 - 6 - 7 can be performed 5 - 6 - 7 can be performed
—
• Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited
• Shift position indicator is switched OFF • Shift position indicator is switched OFF K
• Starter relay is switched OFF (starter is • Starter relay is switched OFF (starter is
disabled) disabled)
• Back-up lamp is OFF • Back-up lamp is OFF
L
• Large shift shock • Large shift shock

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

CAUTION: M
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
[Link]
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at N
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2. O

[Link] DTC DETECTION

With CONSULT P
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “ACCELE POSI” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Shift the selector lever throughout the entire shift position from “P” to “D”. (Hold the selector lever at each
position for 2 seconds or more)
4. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.

Revision: 2015 January TM-111 2015 Q50

 P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR A
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

ACCELE POSI : More than 1.0/8

VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
5. Check DTC.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT”.
Is “P0705” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-112, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281128

[Link] CONTROL VALVE & TCM

Replace control valve & TCM. Refer to TM-216, "Removal and Installation".

>> WORK END

Revision: 2015 January TM-112 2015 Q50

 P0710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011281129

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
TCM judges that the A/T fluid temperature is −40°C (−40°F) or less continu-
ously for 5 seconds while driving at 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more.
TCM judges that the A/T fluid temperature is 180°C (356°F) or more continu- TM
ously for 5 seconds while driving at 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more.
FLUID TEMP SENSOR A The following conditions are maintained for 5 minutes after the completion of
P0710 (Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor A engine diagnosis P0111, P0116, and P0196:
Circuit) E
• A/T fluid temperature − Engine coolant temperature > 33°C (91.4°F)
• A/T fluid temperature − Engine coolant temperature < −19°C (−2.2°F)
A/T fluid temperature does not rise to 20°C (68°F) after driving for a certain
period of time with the TCM-received fluid temperature sensor value between F
−40°C (−40°F) and 20°C (68°F).

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connector G
(Sensor circuit is open or short.)
• A/T fluid temperature sensor
H
FAIL-SAFE

The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
1st fail-safe I
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction-
2nd fail-safe
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
J
Final fail-safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.
K
Vehicle behavior for 1st fail- Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail- Vehicle behavior for final fail-
Vehicle condition
safe safe safe
• The shifting between the L
gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be per- • The shifting between the
Between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 —
formed gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be per-
• Manual mode is prohibited formed
• Manual mode is prohibited
M
• Fix the gear while driving
Between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 —
• Manual mode is prohibited

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE N

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
[Link] O
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
P
>> GO TO 2.
[Link] DTC DETECTION (PART 1)
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Start the engine and maintain the following condition for 10 seconds or more.

Revision: 2015 January TM-113 2015 Q50

 P0710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more

With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT”.
Is “P0710” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-115, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 3.
[Link] A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR FUNCTION
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and cool the engine.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
CAUTION:
Never start the engine.
3. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
4. Select “COOLANT TEMP/S” in “Data Monitor” in “ENGINE”.
5. Check temperature difference between A/T fluid and engine coolant.
With GST
1. Complete engine diagnoses P0111, P0116, and P0196.
2. After starting the engine start, run the engine at idle for 5 minutes.
3. Check the DTC.
Is the temperature calculated by subtracting engine coolant temperature from A/T fluid temperature more than
33°C (91.4°F) or is it less than −19°C (−2.2°F)? (With CONSULT)/Is “P0710” detected? (With GST)
YES >> Go to TM-115, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 [With CONSULT: “ATF TEMP 1” is 20°C (68°F) or more]>>To check malfunction symptom before
repair: Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 [With CONSULT: “ATF TEMP 1” is 20°C (68°F) or more]>>Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION
END
NO-2 [With CONSULT: “ATF TEMP 1” is 19°C (66°F) or less]>>GO TO 4.
NO-3 (With GST)>>GO TO 4.
[Link] DTC DETECTION (PART 2)
With CONSULT
1. Select “SLCT LVR POSI”, “VHCL/S SE-A/T”, “ACCELE POSI”, “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in
“TRANSMISSION”.
2. Record A/T fluid temperature.
3. Start the engine and wait for at least 3 minutes.
4. Drive the vehicle for the total minuets specified in the Driving time column below with the following condi-
tions satisfied.

SLCT LVR POSI :D

VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
ACCELE POSI : 0.5/8 or more

A/T fluid temperature before engine start Driving time

−40°C (−40°F) – −31°C (−23.8°F) 21 minutes or more
−30°C (−22°F) – −21°C (−5.8°F) 18 minutes or more
−20°C (−4°F) – −11°C (12.2°F) 15 minutes or more
−10°C (14°F) – −1°C (30.2°F) 12 minutes or more
0°C (32°F) – 9°C (48.2°F) 9 minutes or more
10°C (50°F) – 19°C (66.2°F) 6 minutes or more
5. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and cool the engine.
2. Start the engine and wait for at least 3 minutes.
3. Drive the vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 21 minutes or more.

Revision: 2015 January TM-114 2015 Q50

 P0710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

Selector lever : D position A

Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
Accelerator pedal opening : 0.5/8 or more
4. Check the DTC. B
Is “P0710” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-115, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". C
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281130
TM
[Link] CONTROL VALVE & TCM
Replace control valve & TCM. Refer to TM-216, "Removal and Installation". E

>> WORK END

F

Revision: 2015 January TM-115 2015 Q50

 P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011281133

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
INPUT SPEED SENSOR A
P0717 (Input/Turbine Speed Sensor A Circuit No The revolution of input speed sensor 1 and/or 2 is 270 rpm or less.
Signal)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connector
(Sensor circuit is open or shorted)
• Input speed sensor 1 and/or 2
FAIL-SAFE

The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
1st fail-safe
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction-
2nd fail-safe
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
Final fail-safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.

Vehicle behavior for 1st fail- Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail- Vehicle behavior for final fail-
Vehicle condition
safe safe safe
• The shifting between the
gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be per- • The shifting between the
Between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 —
formed gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be per-
• Manual mode is prohibited formed
• Fix the gear while driving • Manual mode is prohibited
Between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 —
• Manual mode is prohibited

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
[Link]
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
[Link] DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI”, “GEAR”, “VHCL/S SE-A/T”, “CLSD THL POS” and “ENGINE SPEED” in “Data
Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.
CAUTION:
Keep the same gear position.
NOTE:
Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this
test.

Revision: 2015 January TM-116 2015 Q50

 P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

SLCT LVR POSI :D A

GEAR : 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th or 6th
VHCL/S SE-A/T : More than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
CLSD THL POS : OFF B
ENGINE SPEED : More than 1,500 rpm
4. Check DTC.
With GST C
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT”.
Is “P0717” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-117, "Diagnosis Procedure". TM
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
E
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281134

[Link] CONTROL VALVE & TCM

F
Replace control valve & TCM. Refer to TM-216, "Removal and Installation".

>> WORK END G

Revision: 2015 January TM-117 2015 Q50

 P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011281135

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
• The vehicle speed detected by the output speed sensor is 5 km/h (3 MPH)
or less when the vehicle speed transmitted from the combination meter to
TCM is 20 km/h (12 MPH) or more. (Only when starts after the ignition
switch is turned ON.)
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR • The vehicle speed transmitted from the combination meter to TCM does not
P0720
(Output Speed Sensor Circuit) decrease despite the 36 km/h (23 MPH) or more of deceleration in vehicle
speed detected by the output speed sensor. when the vehicle speed detect-
ed by the output speed sensor is 36 km/h (23 MPH) or more and the vehicle
speed transmitted from the combination meter to TCM is 24 km/h (15 MPH)
or more.

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connector
(Sensor circuit is open or shorted)
• Output speed sensor
FAIL-SAFE

The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
1st fail-safe
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction-
2nd fail-safe
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
Final fail-safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.

Vehicle behavior for 1st fail- Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail- Vehicle behavior for final fail-
DTC Vehicle condition
safe safe safe
• Only downshift can be per-
formed
• Manual mode is prohibited
Between the gears of 1 - 2 - 3 • A vehicle speed signal —
from the unified meter and
A/C amp. is regarded as • The shifting between the
an effective signal gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be
P0720
performed
• Fix the gear at driving • Manual mode is prohibited
• Manual mode is prohibited
Between the gears of 4 - 5 - 6 • A vehicle speed signal
—
-7 from the unified meter and
A/C amp. is regarded as
an effective signal
P0720
and — Locks in 5GR — Locks in 5GR
P1721

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
[Link]
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

Revision: 2015 January TM-118 2015 Q50

 P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
>> GO TO 2.
[Link] DTC DETECTION A

With CONSULT
1. Start the engine. B
2. Select “ESTM VSP SIG” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 60 seconds or more.

ESTM VSP SIG : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more C

4. Check DTC.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT”. TM
Is “P0720” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-119, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". E
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281136
F
[Link] OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR AND CHECK DTC
1. Replace output speed sensor. Refer to TM-228, "2WD : Exploded View" (2WD) or TM-246, "Exploded G
View" (AWD).
2. Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. Refer to TM-118, "DTC Description".
Is the inspection result normal? H
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace control valve & TCM. Refer to TM-216, "Removal and Installation".
I

Revision: 2015 January TM-119 2015 Q50

 P0725 ENGINE SPEED
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0725 ENGINE SPEED
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011281137

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
• TCM does not receive the CAN communication signal from the ECM.
ENGINE SPEED
P0725 • The engine speed is more less 150 rpm even if the vehicle speed is more
(Engine Speed Input Circuit)
than 10 km/h (7 MPH).

POSSIBLE CAUSE
Harness or connector
(CAN communication line is open or shorted)
FAIL-SAFE
Not changed from normal driving
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
[Link]
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
[Link] DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.

SLCT LVR POSI :D

VHCL/S SE-A/T : More than 10 km/h (7 MPH)
4. Check DTC.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT”.
Is “P0725” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-120, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281138

[Link] DTC OF ECM

With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “ENGINE”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to EC-108, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
[Link] DTC OF TCM
With CONSULT
Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.

Revision: 2015 January TM-120 2015 Q50

 P0725 ENGINE SPEED
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Is any DTC other than “P0725” detected?
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to TM-84, "DTC Index". A
NO >> Replace control valve & TCM. Refer to TM-216, "Removal and Installation".

TM

Revision: 2015 January TM-121 2015 Q50

 P0729 6GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0729 6GR INCORRECT RATIO
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011281139

This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 6GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not
only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control
valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
The gear ratio is:
6GR INCORRECT RATIO
P0729 • 0.923 or more
(Gear 6 Incorrect Ratio)
• 0.819 or less

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
• High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Each clutch and brake
• Output speed sensor
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
• Hydraulic control circuit
FAIL-SAFE

The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
1st fail-safe
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction-
2nd fail-safe
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
Final fail-safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.

Vehicle behavior for 1st fail- Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail- Vehicle behavior for final fail-
Vehicle condition
safe safe safe
Engine torque limit: Max 150 Engine torque limit: Max 150
Small gear ratio difference —
Nm Nm

Revision: 2015 January TM-122 2015 Q50

 P0729 6GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Vehicle behavior for 1st fail- Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail- Vehicle behavior for final fail-
Vehicle condition
safe safe safe A
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the
gears of 1 - 2 can be per- B
Neutral mal- formed
function be- • The shifting between the
• Locks in 2GR, 3GR or 4GR
tween the — gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be per-
• Manual mode is prohibited
gears of 1 - 2 - formed C
3 and 7 • The shifting between the
gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be per-
formed
• Manual mode is prohibited TM
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the
Great gear ra- gears of 1 - 2 can be per- E
tio difference formed
• The shifting between the
gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be per-
formed F
• Locks in 1GR, 2GR, 3GR, • The shifting between the
• The shifting between the
Other than the 4GR, 5GR or 6GR gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be per-
gears of 2 - 3 - 4 can be per-
above • Fix the gear while driving formed
formed
• Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited G
• The shifting between the
gears of 3 - 4 can be per-
formed
• The shifting between the
H
gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be per-
formed
• Manual mode is prohibited
I
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• “TM-124, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE”. J
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. K
[Link]
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test. L

>> GO TO 2.
M
[Link] ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine. N
2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.
O
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)

With GST
1. Start the engine. P
2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
Is ATF temperature within specified range?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
[Link] SYMPTOM (PART 1)
With CONSULT

Revision: 2015 January TM-123 2015 Q50

 P0729 6GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
1. Select “6TH GR FNCTN P0729” in “DTC Work Support” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions.

GEAR : 6th
ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT screen changes from “OUT OF CON-
DITION” to “TESTING”.
CAUTION:
When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results” in
“TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0729” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM-84,
"DTC Index".
With GST
1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.

Selector lever : “M” position

Gear position : 6th
Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
2. Check DTC.
Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0729”
detected?
YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again.
YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4.
YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-124, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES-4 (“P0729” is detected)>>Go to TM-124, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 4.
[Link] SYMPTOM (PART 2)
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock.

>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281140

[Link] INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Disassemble the transmission assembly to check component parts. Refer to TM-263, "Disassembly".
NOTE:
Check the component parts, referring to “Possible cause” in “DTC DETECTION LOGIC”. Refer to TM-122,
"DTC Description".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace control valve & TCM. Refer to TM-216, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2015 January TM-124 2015 Q50

 P0730 INCORRECT GEAR RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0730 INCORRECT GEAR RATIO
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011281141

• TCM detects a high-rpm state of the under drive sun gear. B

• The number of revolutions of the under drive sun gear is calculated with the input speed sensor 1 and 2.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
C
CONSULT screen terms
DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
The revolution of under drive sun gear is 8,000 rpm or more. TM
INCORRECT GR RATIO NOTE:
P0730
(Incorrect Gear Ratio) Not detected when in “P” or “N” position and during a shift to “P” or “N” posi-
tion.
E
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Input speed sensor 2 F

FAIL-SAFE
G
The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
1st fail-safe
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction- H
2nd fail-safe
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
Final fail-safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control. I

Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe
J
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2
• The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 -
• Locks in 5GR, 6GR or 7GR can be performed
3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 - K
• Manual mode is prohibited
3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE L

CAUTION:
• “TM-126, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE”.
M
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
N
[Link]
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test. O

>> GO TO 2.
[Link] DTC DETECTION P

With CONSULT
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “ENGINE”.
3. Drive vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the
table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.

Revision: 2015 January TM-125 2015 Q50

 P0730 INCORRECT GEAR RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

ENGINE SPEED Same value as the Freeze Frame Data.

VEHICLE SPEED Same value as the Freeze Frame Data.
B/FUEL SCHDL Same value as the Freeze Frame Data.
4. Check DTC.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT”.
Is “P0730” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-126, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281142

[Link] INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Disassemble the transmission assembly to check component parts. Refer to TM-263, "Disassembly".
NOTE:
Check the component parts, referring to “Possible cause” in “DTC DETECTION LOGIC”. Refer to TM-125,
"DTC Description".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace control valve & TCM. Refer to TM-216, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2015 January TM-126 2015 Q50

 P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011281143

This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 1GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not B
only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control
valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC C

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
TM
The gear ratio is:
1GR INCORRECT RATIO
P0731 • 5.069 or more
(Gear 1 Incorrect Ratio)
• 4.496 or less
E
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
F
• High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve
• 2346 brake solenoid valve G
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Each clutch and brake
• Output speed sensor H
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
• Hydraulic control circuit
FAIL-SAFE I

The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
1st fail-safe
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
J
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction-
2nd fail-safe
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
K
Final fail-safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.

Vehicle behavior for 1st fail- Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail- Vehicle behavior for final fail-
L
Vehicle condition
safe safe safe
Engine torque limit: Max 150 Engine torque limit: Max 150
Small gear ratio difference —
Nm Nm M

Revision: 2015 January TM-127 2015 Q50

 P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Vehicle behavior for 1st fail- Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail- Vehicle behavior for final fail-
Vehicle condition
safe safe safe
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the
gears of 1 - 2 can be per-
Neutral mal- formed
function be- • The shifting between the
• Locks in 2GR, 3GR or 4GR
tween the — gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be per-
• Manual mode is prohibited
gears of 1 - 2 - formed
3 and 7 • The shifting between the
gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be per-
formed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the
Great gear ra- gears of 1 - 2 can be per-
tio difference formed
• The shifting between the
gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be per-
formed
• Locks in 1GR, 2GR, 3GR, • The shifting between the
• The shifting between the
Other than the 4GR, 5GR or 6GR gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be per-
gears of 2 - 3 - 4 can be per-
above • Fix the gear while driving formed
formed
• Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited
• The shifting between the
gears of 3 - 4 can be per-
formed
• The shifting between the
gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be per-
formed
• Manual mode is prohibited

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

CAUTION:
• “TM-129, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE”.
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
[Link]
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
[Link] ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.

ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)

With GST
1. Start the engine.
2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
Is ATF temperature within specified range?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
[Link] SYMPTOM (PART 1)
With CONSULT

Revision: 2015 January TM-128 2015 Q50

 P0731 1GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
1. Select “1ST GR FNCTN P0731” in “DTC Work Support” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions. A

GEAR : 1st
ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more B
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT screen changes from “OUT OF CON-
DITION” to “TESTING”. C
CAUTION:
When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results” in
“TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0731” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM-84,
"DTC Index". TM
With GST
1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.
E
Selector lever : “M” position
Gear position : 1st
Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more F
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
2. Check DTC.
Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0731” G
detected?
YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again.
YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4. H
YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-129, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES-4 (“P0731” is detected)>>Go to TM-129, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 4. I
[Link] SYMPTOM (PART 2)
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock. J

>> INSPECTION END

K
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281144

[Link] INTERMITTENT INCIDENT L

Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. M
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] MALFUNCTIONING ITEM N
Disassemble the transmission assembly to check component parts. Refer to TM-263, "Disassembly".
NOTE:
Check the component parts, referring to “Possible cause” in “DTC DETECTION LOGIC”. Refer to TM-127,
"DTC Description". O
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace control valve & TCM. Refer to TM-216, "Removal and Installation".
P
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2015 January TM-129 2015 Q50

 P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011281145

This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 2GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not
only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control
valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
The gear ratio is:
2GR INCORRECT RATIO
P0732 • 3.289 or more
(Gear 2 Incorrect Ratio)
• 2.917 or less

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
• High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Each clutch and brake
• Output speed sensor
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
• Hydraulic control circuit
FAIL-SAFE

The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
1st fail-safe
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction-
2nd fail-safe
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
Final fail-safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.

Vehicle behavior for 1st fail- Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail- Vehicle behavior for final fail-
Vehicle condition
safe safe safe
Engine torque limit: Max 150 Engine torque limit: Max 150
Small gear ratio difference —
Nm Nm

Revision: 2015 January TM-130 2015 Q50

 P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Vehicle behavior for 1st fail- Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail- Vehicle behavior for final fail-
Vehicle condition
safe safe safe A
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the
gears of 1 - 2 can be per- B
Neutral mal- formed
function be- • The shifting between the
• Locks in 2GR, 3GR or 4GR
tween the — gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be per-
• Manual mode is prohibited
gears of 1 - 2 - formed C
3 and 7 • The shifting between the
gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be per-
formed
• Manual mode is prohibited TM
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the
Great gear ra- gears of 1 - 2 can be per- E
tio difference formed
• The shifting between the
gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be per-
formed F
• Locks in 1GR, 2GR, 3GR, • The shifting between the
• The shifting between the
Other than the 4GR, 5GR or 6GR gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be per-
gears of 2 - 3 - 4 can be per-
above • Fix the gear while driving formed
formed
• Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited G
• The shifting between the
gears of 3 - 4 can be per-
formed
• The shifting between the
H
gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be per-
formed
• Manual mode is prohibited
I
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• “TM-132, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE”. J
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. K
[Link]
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test. L

>> GO TO 2.
M
[Link] ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine. N
2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.
O
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)

With GST
1. Start the engine. P
2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
Is ATF temperature within specified range?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
[Link] SYMPTOM (PART 1)
With CONSULT

Revision: 2015 January TM-131 2015 Q50

 P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
1. Select “2ND GR FNCTN P0732” in “DTC Work Support” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions.

GEAR : 2nd
ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT screen changes from “OUT OF CON-
DITION” to “TESTING”.
CAUTION:
When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results” in
“TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0732” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM-84,
"DTC Index".
With GST
1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.

Selector lever : “M” position

Gear position : 2nd
Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
2. Check DTC.
Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0732”
detected?
YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again.
YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4.
YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-132, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES-4 (“P0732” is detected)>>Go to TM-132, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 4.
[Link] SYMPTOM (PART 2)
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock.

>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281146

[Link] INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Disassemble the transmission assembly to check component parts. Refer to TM-263, "Disassembly".
NOTE:
Check the component parts, referring to “Possible cause” in “DTC DETECTION LOGIC”. Refer to TM-130,
"DTC Description".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace control valve & TCM. Refer to TM-216, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2015 January TM-132 2015 Q50

 P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011281147

This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 3GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not B
only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control
valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC C

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
TM
The gear ratio is:
3GR INCORRECT RATIO
P0733 • 2.103 or more
(Gear 3 Incorrect Ratio)
• 1.865 or less
E
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
F
• High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve
• 2346 brake solenoid valve G
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Each clutch and brake
• Output speed sensor H
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
• Hydraulic control circuit
FAIL-SAFE I

The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
1st fail-safe
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
J
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction-
2nd fail-safe
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
K
Final fail-safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.

Vehicle behavior for 1st fail- Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail- Vehicle behavior for final fail-
L
Vehicle condition
safe safe safe
Engine torque limit: Max 150 Engine torque limit: Max 150
Small gear ratio difference —
Nm Nm M

Revision: 2015 January TM-133 2015 Q50

 P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Vehicle behavior for 1st fail- Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail- Vehicle behavior for final fail-
Vehicle condition
safe safe safe
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the
gears of 1 - 2 can be per-
Neutral mal- formed
function be- • The shifting between the
• Locks in 2GR, 3GR or 4GR
tween the — gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be per-
• Manual mode is prohibited
gears of 1 - 2 - formed
3 and 7 • The shifting between the
gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be per-
formed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the
Great gear ra- gears of 1 - 2 can be per-
tio difference formed
• The shifting between the
gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be per-
formed
• Locks in 1GR, 2GR, 3GR, • The shifting between the
• The shifting between the
Other than the 4GR, 5GR or 6GR gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be per-
gears of 2 - 3 - 4 can be per-
above • Fix the gear while driving formed
formed
• Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited
• The shifting between the
gears of 3 - 4 can be per-
formed
• The shifting between the
gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be per-
formed
• Manual mode is prohibited

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

CAUTION:
• “TM-135, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE”.
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
[Link]
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
[Link] ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.

ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)

With GST
1. Start the engine.
2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
Is ATF temperature within specified range?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
[Link] SYMPTOM (PART 1)
With CONSULT

Revision: 2015 January TM-134 2015 Q50

 P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
1. Select “3RD GR FNCTN P0733” in “DTC Work Support” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions. A

GEAR : 3rd
ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more B
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT screen changes from “OUT OF CON-
DITION” to “TESTING”. C
CAUTION:
When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results” in
“TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0733” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM-84,
"DTC Index". TM
With GST
1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.
E
Selector lever : “M” position
Gear position : 3rd
Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more F
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
2. Check DTC.
Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0733” G
detected?
YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again.
YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4. H
YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-135, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES-4 (“P0733” is detected)>>Go to TM-135, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 4. I
[Link] SYMPTOM (PART 2)
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock. J

>> INSPECTION END

K
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281148

[Link] INTERMITTENT INCIDENT L

Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. M
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] MALFUNCTIONING ITEM N
Disassemble the transmission assembly to check component parts. Refer to TM-263, "Disassembly".
NOTE:
Check the component parts, referring to “Possible cause” in “DTC DETECTION LOGIC”. Refer to TM-133,
"DTC Description". O
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace control valve & TCM. Refer to TM-216, "Removal and Installation".
P
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2015 January TM-135 2015 Q50

 P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011281149

This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 4GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not
only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control
valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
The gear ratio is:
4GR INCORRECT RATIO
P0734 • 1.453 or more
(Gear 4 Incorrect Ratio)
• 1.289 or less

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
• High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Each clutch and brake
• Output speed sensor
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
• Hydraulic control circuit
FAIL-SAFE

The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
1st fail-safe
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction-
2nd fail-safe
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
Final fail-safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.

Vehicle behavior for 1st fail- Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail- Vehicle behavior for final fail-
Vehicle condition
safe safe safe
Engine torque limit: Max 150 Engine torque limit: Max 150
Small gear ratio difference —
Nm Nm

Revision: 2015 January TM-136 2015 Q50

 P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Vehicle behavior for 1st fail- Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail- Vehicle behavior for final fail-
Vehicle condition
safe safe safe A
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the
gears of 1 - 2 can be per- B
Neutral mal- formed
function be- • The shifting between the
• Locks in 2GR, 3GR or 4GR
tween the — gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be per-
• Manual mode is prohibited
gears of 1 - 2 - formed C
3 and 7 • The shifting between the
gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be per-
formed
• Manual mode is prohibited TM
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the
Great gear ra- gears of 1 - 2 can be per- E
tio difference formed
• The shifting between the
gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be per-
formed F
• Locks in 1GR, 2GR, 3GR, • The shifting between the
• The shifting between the
Other than the 4GR, 5GR or 6GR gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be per-
gears of 2 - 3 - 4 can be per-
above • Fix the gear while driving formed
formed
• Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited G
• The shifting between the
gears of 3 - 4 can be per-
formed
• The shifting between the
H
gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be per-
formed
• Manual mode is prohibited
I
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• “TM-138, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE”. J
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. K
[Link]
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test. L

>> GO TO 2.
M
[Link] ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine. N
2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.
O
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)

With GST
1. Start the engine. P
2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
Is ATF temperature within specified range?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
[Link] SYMPTOM (PART 1)
With CONSULT

Revision: 2015 January TM-137 2015 Q50

 P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
1. Select “4TH GR FNCTN P0734” in “DTC Work Support” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions.

GEAR : 4th
ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT screen changes from “OUT OF CON-
DITION” to “TESTING”.
CAUTION:
When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results” in
“TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0734” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM-84,
"DTC Index".
With GST
1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.

Selector lever : “M” position

Gear position : 4th
Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
2. Check DTC.
Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0734”
detected?
YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again.
YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4.
YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-138, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES-4 (“P0734” is detected)>>Go to TM-138, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 4.
[Link] SYMPTOM (PART 2)
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock.

>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281150

[Link] INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Disassemble the transmission assembly to check component parts. Refer to TM-263, "Disassembly".
NOTE:
Check the component parts, referring to “Possible cause” in “DTC DETECTION LOGIC”. Refer to TM-136,
"DTC Description".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace control valve & TCM. Refer to TM-216, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2015 January TM-138 2015 Q50

 P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011281151

This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 5GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not B
only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control
valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC C

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
TM
The gear ratio is:
5GR INCORRECT RATIO
P0735 • 1.060 or more
(Gear 5 Incorrect Circuit)
• 0.940 or less
E
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
F
• High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve
• 2346 brake solenoid valve G
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Each clutch and brake
• Output speed sensor H
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
• Hydraulic control circuit
FAIL-SAFE I

The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
1st fail-safe
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
J
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction-
2nd fail-safe
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
K
Final fail-safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.

Vehicle behavior for 1st fail- Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail- Vehicle behavior for final fail-
L
Vehicle condition
safe safe safe
Engine torque limit: Max 150 Engine torque limit: Max 150
Small gear ratio difference —
Nm Nm M

Revision: 2015 January TM-139 2015 Q50

 P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Vehicle behavior for 1st fail- Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail- Vehicle behavior for final fail-
Vehicle condition
safe safe safe
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the
gears of 1 - 2 can be per-
Neutral mal- formed
function be- • The shifting between the
• Locks in 2GR, 3GR or 4GR
tween the — gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be per-
• Manual mode is prohibited
gears of 1 - 2 - formed
3 and 7 • The shifting between the
gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be per-
formed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the
Great gear ra- gears of 1 - 2 can be per-
tio difference formed
• The shifting between the
gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be per-
formed
• Locks in 1GR, 2GR, 3GR, • The shifting between the
• The shifting between the
Other than the 4GR, 5GR or 6GR gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be per-
gears of 2 - 3 - 4 can be per-
above • Fix the gear while driving formed
formed
• Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited
• The shifting between the
gears of 3 - 4 can be per-
formed
• The shifting between the
gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be per-
formed
• Manual mode is prohibited

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

CAUTION:
• “TM-141, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE”.
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
[Link]
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
[Link] ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.

ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)

With GST
1. Start the engine.
2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
Is ATF temperature within specified range?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
[Link] SYMPTOM (PART 1)
With CONSULT

Revision: 2015 January TM-140 2015 Q50

 P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
1. Select “5TH GR FNCTN P0735” in “DTC Work Support” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions. A

GEAR : 5th
ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more B
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT screen changes from “OUT OF CON-
DITION” to “TESTING”. C
CAUTION:
When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results” in
“TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0735” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM-84,
"DTC Index". TM
With GST
1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.
E
Selector lever : “M” position
Gear position : 5th
Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more F
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
2. Check DTC.
Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0735” G
detected?
YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again.
YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4. H
YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-141, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES-4 (“P0735” is detected)>>Go to TM-141, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 4. I
[Link] SYMPTOM (PART 2)
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock. J

>> INSPECTION END

K
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281152

[Link] INTERMITTENT INCIDENT L

Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. M
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] MALFUNCTIONING ITEM N
Disassemble the transmission assembly to check component parts. Refer to TM-263, "Disassembly".
NOTE:
Check the component parts, referring to “Possible cause” in “DTC DETECTION LOGIC”. Refer to TM-139,
"DTC Description". O
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace control valve & TCM. Refer to TM-216, "Removal and Installation".
P
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2015 January TM-141 2015 Q50

 P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011281153

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
The torque converter clutch solenoid valve monitor value is 0.2 A or less when
TORQUE CONVERTER
P0740 the torque converter clutch solenoid valve command value is more than 0.75
(Torque Converter Clutch Circuit/Open)
A.

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connector
(Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted)
• Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
FAIL-SAFE

The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
1st fail-safe
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction-
2nd fail-safe
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
Final fail-safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.

Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe
• Lock-up is prohibited • Lock-up is prohibited
—
• Slip lock-up is prohibited • Slip lock-up is prohibited

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
[Link]
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
[Link] DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VEHICLE SPEED” in “Data Monitor” in
“TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 10 seconds or more.
NOTE:
Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this
test.

BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more

MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 2nd
VEHICLE SPEED : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more
4. Check DTC.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT”.

Revision: 2015 January TM-142 2015 Q50

 P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Is “P0740” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-143, "Diagnosis Procedure". A
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281154
B

[Link] CONTROL VALVE & TCM

C
Replace control valve & TCM. Refer to TM-216, "Removal and Installation".

>> END TM

Revision: 2015 January TM-143 2015 Q50

 P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011281155

This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not lock-up. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction
(circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid
valve operation, etc.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
TORQUE CONVERTER
P0744 (Torque Converter Clutch Circuit Intermit- The lock-up is not performed in spite of within the lock-up area.
tent)

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connector
• Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
• Torque converter
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
• Hydraulic control circuit
FAIL-SAFE

The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
1st fail-safe
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction-
2nd fail-safe
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
Final fail-safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.

Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe
• Lock-up is prohibited • Lock-up is prohibited
—
• Slip lock-up is prohibited • Slip lock-up is prohibited

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
[Link]
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
[Link] DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VEHICLE SPEED” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 10 seconds or more.
NOTE:
Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this
test.

MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 2nd
VEHICLE SPEED : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more

Revision: 2015 January TM-144 2015 Q50

 P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
4. Check DTC.
With GST A
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT”.
Is “P0744” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-145, "Diagnosis Procedure". B
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281156
C

[Link] MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

TM
Disassemble the transmission to check component parts. Refer to TM-263, "Disassembly".
NOTE:
Check the component parts, referring to “Possible cause” in “DTC DETECTION LOGIC”. Refer to TM-144,
"DTC Description". E
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace control valve & TCM. Refer to TM-216, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. F

Revision: 2015 January TM-145 2015 Q50

 P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011281157

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
PC SOLENOID A The line pressure solenoid valve monitor value is 0.2 A or less when the line
P0745
(Pressure Control Solenoid A) pressure solenoid valve command value is more than 0.75 A.

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connector
(Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted)
• Line pressure solenoid valve
FAIL-SAFE
Not changed from normal driving
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
[Link]
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
[Link] DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT” and “SLCT LVR POSI” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Shift the selector lever to “N” position.
4. Maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.

BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more

SLCT LVR POSI : N/P
5. Check DTC.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT”.
Is “P0745” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-146, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281158

[Link] CONTROL VALVE & TCM

Replace control valve & TCM. Refer to TM-216, "Removal and Installation".

>> WORK END

Revision: 2015 January TM-146 2015 Q50

 P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID A
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID A
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011281159

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
• The anti-interlock solenoid valve monitor value is ON when the anti-inter-
SHIFT SOLENOID A lock solenoid valve command value is OFF.
P0750
(Shift Solenoid A) • The anti-interlock solenoid valve monitor value is OFF when the anti-inter-
lock solenoid valve command value is ON. TM

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connector E
(Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted)
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
FAIL-SAFE F

The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
1st fail-safe
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
G
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction-
2nd fail-safe
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not H
Final fail-safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.

Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe I
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 -
3 can be performed J
• The shifting between the gears of 3 - 4 -
• Locks in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR, 5GR, 6GR or
5 can be performed
7GR —
• The shifting between the gears of 4 - 5 -
• Manual mode is prohibited K
6 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 -
3 - 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
L
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. M
[Link]
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
N
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
O
[Link] DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine. P
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in
“TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.

BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more

MANU MODE SW : ON

Revision: 2015 January TM-147 2015 Q50

 P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID A
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
GEAR : 1st
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
4. Check DTC.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT”.
Is “P0750” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-148, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281160

[Link] CONTROL VALVE & TCM

Replace control valve & TCM. Refer to TM-216, "Removal and Installation".

>> WORK END

Revision: 2015 January TM-148 2015 Q50

 P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011281161

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
PC SOLENOID B The input clutch solenoid valve monitor value is 0.2 A or less when the input
P0775
(Pressure Control Solenoid B) clutch solenoid valve command value is more than 0.75 A.

POSSIBLE CAUSE TM
• Harness or connector
(Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted)
• Input clutch solenoid valve E
FAIL-SAFE

The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to F
1st fail-safe
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction-
2nd fail-safe
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured. G
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
Final fail-safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control. H

Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe
• Locks in 1GR I
• The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 -
3 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears of 3 - 4 -
• Locks in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR, 5GR, 6GR or J
5 can be performed
7GR —
• The shifting between the gears of 4 - 5 -
• Manual mode is prohibited
6 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 -
3 - 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed K
• Manual mode is prohibited

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

L
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
[Link] M
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
N
>> GO TO 2.
[Link] DTC DETECTION
O
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in
“TRANSMISSION”. P
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.

BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more

MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 1st
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more

Revision: 2015 January TM-149 2015 Q50

 P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
4. Check DTC.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT”.
Is “P0775” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-150, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281162

[Link] CONTROL VALVE & TCM

Replace control valve & TCM. Refer to TM-216, "Removal and Installation".

>> WORK END

Revision: 2015 January TM-150 2015 Q50

 P0780 SHIFT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0780 SHIFT
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011281163

The TCM detects the malfunction of low brake solenoid valve. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction B
(circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid
valve operation, etc.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC C

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
TM
• When shifting from 3GR to 4GR with the selector lever in “D” position, the
SHIFT gear ratio does not shift to 1.371 (gear ratio of 4th).
P0780
(Shift Error) • When shifting from 5GR to 6GR or 6GR to 7GR, the engine speed exceeds
the prescribed speed. E

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve F
• Hydraulic control circuit
FAIL-SAFE G

The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
1st fail-safe
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
H
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction-
2nd fail-safe
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
Final fail-safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving. I
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.

Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe J
• The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 -
• Locks in 3GR
— 3 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Manual mode is prohibited K
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• “TM-152, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCE- L
DURE”.
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction. M
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
[Link]
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at N
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2. O

[Link] DTC DETECTION

With CONSULT P
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI”, “ACCELE POSI” and “GEAR” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions.

SLCT LVR POSI :D

ACCELE POSI : More than 1.0/8
GEAR : 3rd → 4th

Revision: 2015 January TM-151 2015 Q50

 P0780 SHIFT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
4. Check DTC.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT”.
Is “P0780” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-152, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281164

[Link] INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Disassemble the transmission assembly to check component parts. Refer to TM-263, "Disassembly".
NOTE:
Check the component parts, referring to “Possible cause” in “DTC DETECTION LOGIC”. Refer to TM-151,
"DTC Description".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace control valve & TCM. Refer to TM-216, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2015 January TM-152 2015 Q50

 P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID C
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID C
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011281165

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
PC SOLENOID C The front brake solenoid valve monitor value is 0.2 A or less when the front
P0795
(Pressure Control Solenoid C) brake solenoid valve command value is more than 0.75 A.

POSSIBLE CAUSE TM
• Harness or connector
(Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted)
• Front brake solenoid valve E
FAIL-SAFE

The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to F
1st fail-safe
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction-
2nd fail-safe
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured. G
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
Final fail-safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control. H

Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe
• Locks in 1GR I
• The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 -
3 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears of 3 - 4 -
• Locks in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR, 5GR, 6GR or J
5 can be performed
7GR —
• The shifting between the gears of 4 - 5 -
• Manual mode is prohibited
6 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 -
3 - 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed K
• Manual mode is prohibited

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

L
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
[Link] M
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
N
>> GO TO 2.
[Link] DTC DETECTION
O
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in
“TRANSMISSION”. P
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.

BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more

MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 7th
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more

Revision: 2015 January TM-153 2015 Q50

 P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID C
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
4. Check DTC.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT”.
Is “P0795” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-154, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281166

[Link] CONTROL VALVE & TCM

Replace control valve & TCM. Refer to TM-216, "Removal and Installation".

>> END

Revision: 2015 January TM-154 2015 Q50

 P1705 TP SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P1705 TP SENSOR
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011281167

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
TP SENSOR
TCM detects the difference between two accelerator pedal position signals re-
P1705 (Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Signal
ceived from ECM via CAN communication.
Circuit)
TM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Harness or connector
(CAN communication line is open or shorted) E
FAIL-SAFE

The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to F
1st fail-safe
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction-
2nd fail-safe
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured. G
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
Final fail-safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.
H

Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe
• Downshift when accelerator pedal is de- • Downshift when accelerator pedal is de- • Downshift when accelerator pedal is de- I
pressed is prohibited pressed is prohibited pressed is prohibited
• Upshift when accelerator pedal is re- • Upshift when accelerator pedal is re- • Upshift when accelerator pedal is re-
leased is prohibited leased is prohibited leased is prohibited
• Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited J
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
[Link] K
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
L
>> GO TO 2.
[Link] DTC DETECTION M
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”. N
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.

SLCT LVR POSI :D

VHCL/S SE-A/T : 5 km/h (3 MPH) or more O

4. Check DTC.
Is “P1705” detected? P
YES >> Go to TM-155, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281168

[Link] DTC OF ECM

Revision: 2015 January TM-155 2015 Q50
 P1705 TP SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “ENGINE”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to EC-108, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
[Link] DTC OF TCM
With CONSULT
Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is any DTC other than “P1705” detected?
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to TM-84, "DTC Index".
NO >> Replace control valve & TCM. Refer to TM-216, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2015 January TM-156 2015 Q50

 P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011281169

The vehicle speed signal is transmitted from combination meter to TCM via CAN communication line. The sig- B
nal functions as an auxiliary device to the output speed sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM will then
use the vehicle speed signal.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC C

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
TM
• The vehicle speed transmitted from the combination meter to TCM is 5 km/
h (3 MPH) or less when the vehicle speed detected by the output speed
sensor is 20 km/h (12 MPH) or more. (Only when starts after the ignition
switch is turned ON.) E
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNA
P1721 • The vehicle speed detected by the output speed sensor does not decrease
(Vehicle Speed Signal Circuit)
despite the 36 km/h (23 MPH) or more of deceleration in vehicle speed re-
ceived from the combination meter when the vehicle speed transmitted from
the combination meter to TCM is 36 km/h (23 MPH) or more and the vehicle F
speed detected by the output speed sensor is 24 km/h (15 MPH) or more.

POSSIBLE CAUSE
G
Harness or connector
(CAN communication line is open or shorted)
FAIL-SAFE H

The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
1st fail-safe
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
I
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction-
2nd fail-safe
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
J
Final fail-safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.

DTC Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe K
P0720
and Locks in 5GR — Locks in 5GR
P1721 L

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. M

[Link]
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at N
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2. O
[Link] DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT P
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “ESTM VSP SIG” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 60 seconds or more.

ESTM VSP SIG : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more

4. Check DTC.
Is “P1721” detected?

Revision: 2015 January TM-157 2015 Q50

 P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
YES >> Go to TM-158, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281170

[Link] DTC OF COMBINATION METER

With CONSULT
Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “METER/M&A”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to MWI-80, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
[Link] DTC OF TCM
With CONSULT
Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is any DTC other than “P1721” detected?
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to TM-84, "DTC Index".
NO >> Replace control valve & TCM. Refer to TM-216, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2015 January TM-158 2015 Q50

 P1730 INTERLOCK
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P1730 INTERLOCK
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011281171

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
INTERLOCK The output speed sensor detects the deceleration of 12 km/h (7 MPH) or more
P1730
(Interlock) for 1 second.
NOTE: TM
When the vehicle is driven fixed in 2GR, an input speed sensor malfunction is displayed, but this is
not an input speed sensor malfunction.
POSSIBLE CAUSE E
• Harness or connectors (Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted)
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve F
• High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve
• 2346 brake solenoid valve G
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Each clutch
• Hydraulic control circuit H
FAIL-SAFE

The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to I
1st fail-safe
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction-
2nd fail-safe
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured. J
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
Final fail-safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.
K

Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe
• Locks in 1GR L
• The shifting between the gears of 2 - 3 -
4 can be performed
• Locks in 1GR, 2GR, 3GR, 4GR, 5GR, • The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 -
• The shifting between the gears of 3 - 4
6GR or 7GR 3 can be performed M
can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited
• The shifting between the gears of 4 - 5 -
6 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited
N
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• “TM-160, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCE- O
DURE”.
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. P
[Link]
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2.

Revision: 2015 January TM-159 2015 Q50

 P1730 INTERLOCK
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

[Link] DTC DETECTION

With CONSULT
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “GEAR” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle the following condition.

SLCT LVR POSI :D

GEAR : 1st through 7th
4. Check DTC.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT”.
Is “P1730” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-160, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
Judgment of Interlock INFOID:0000000011281172

Refer to TM-80, "Fail-Safe".

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281173

[Link] INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Disassemble the transmission assembly to check component parts. Refer to TM-263, "Disassembly".
NOTE:
Check the component parts, referring to “Possible cause” in “DTC DETECTION LOGIC”. Refer to TM-159,
"DTC Description".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace control valve & TCM. Refer to TM-216, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2015 January TM-160 2015 Q50

 P1734 7GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P1734 7GR INCORRECT RATIO
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011281174

This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 7GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not B
only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control
valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC C

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
TM
The gear ratio is:
7GR INCORRECT RATIO
P1734 • 0.822 or more
(Gear 7 Incorrect Ratio)
• 0.730 or less
E
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Input clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
F
• High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
• Front brake solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve
• 2346 brake solenoid valve G
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Each clutch and brake
• Output speed sensor H
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
• Hydraulic control circuit
FAIL-SAFE I

The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
1st fail-safe
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
J
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction-
2nd fail-safe
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
K
Final fail-safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.

Vehicle behavior for 1st fail- Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail- Vehicle behavior for final fail-
L
Vehicle condition
safe safe safe
Engine torque limit: Max 150 Engine torque limit: Max 150
Small gear ratio difference —
Nm Nm M

Revision: 2015 January TM-161 2015 Q50

 P1734 7GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Vehicle behavior for 1st fail- Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail- Vehicle behavior for final fail-
Vehicle condition
safe safe safe
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the
gears of 1 - 2 can be per-
Neutral mal- formed
function be- • The shifting between the
• Locks in 2GR, 3GR or 4GR
tween the — gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be per-
• Manual mode is prohibited
gears of 1 - 2 - formed
3 and 7 • The shifting between the
gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be per-
formed
• Manual mode is prohibited
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the
Great gear ra- gears of 1 - 2 can be per-
tio difference formed
• The shifting between the
gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be per-
formed
• Locks in 1GR, 2GR, 3GR, • The shifting between the
• The shifting between the
Other than the 4GR, 5GR or 6GR gears of 1 - 2 - 3 can be per-
gears of 2 - 3 - 4 can be per-
above • Fix the gear while driving formed
formed
• Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited
• The shifting between the
gears of 3 - 4 can be per-
formed
• The shifting between the
gears of 4 - 5 - 6 can be per-
formed
• Manual mode is prohibited

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

CAUTION:
• “TM-163, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE”.
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
[Link]
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
[Link] ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.

ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)

With GST
1. Start the engine.
2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
Is ATF temperature within specified range?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
[Link] SYMPTOM (PART 1)
With CONSULT

Revision: 2015 January TM-162 2015 Q50

 P1734 7GR INCORRECT RATIO
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
1. Select “7TH GR FNCTN P1734” in “DTC Work Support” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions. A

GEAR : 7th
ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more B
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT screen changes from “OUT OF CON-
DITION” to “TESTING”. C
CAUTION:
When “TESTING” is not indicated on CONSULT for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results” in
“TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P1734” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM-84,
"DTC Index". TM
With GST
1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.
E
Selector lever : “M” position
Gear position : 7th
Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more F
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
2. Check DTC.
Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P1734” G
detected?
YES-1 (OUT OF CONDITION)>>Perform “Step 3” again.
YES-2 (STOP VEHICLE)>>GO TO 4. H
YES-3 (COMPLETED RESULT NG)>>Go to TM-163, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES-4 (“P1734” is detected)>>Go to TM-163, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 4. I
[Link] SYMPTOM (PART 2)
With CONSULT
J
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock.

K
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281175

L
[Link] INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal? M
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] MALFUNCTIONING ITEM N

Disassemble the transmission assembly to check component parts. Refer to TM-263, "Disassembly".
NOTE: O
Check the component parts, referring to “Possible cause” in “DTC DETECTION LOGIC”. Refer to TM-161,
"DTC Description".
Is the inspection result normal?
P
YES >> Replace control valve & TCM. Refer to TM-216, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2015 January TM-163 2015 Q50

 P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011281176

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
• TCM monitors manual mode, non manual mode, up or down switch signal,
and detects as irregular when impossible input pattern occurs 2 second or
M-MODE SWITCH
P1815 more.
(Manual Mode Switch Circuit)
• Shift up/down signal of paddle shifter continuously remains ON for 60 sec-
onds.*
*: With paddle shifter
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connector (These switches circuit is open or shorted)
• Mode select switch (Into A/T shift selector)
• Position select switch (Into A/T shift selector)
• Paddle shifter (With paddle shifter)
FAIL-SAFE

The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
1st fail-safe
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction-
2nd fail-safe
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
Final fail-safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.

Vehicle behavior for 1st fail- Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail- Vehicle behavior for final fail-
Vehicle condition
safe safe safe
Only the gate switch is prohibit- Only the gate switch is prohibit-
Gate switch malfunction —
ed ed
Only the paddle switch is pro- Only the paddle switch is pro-
Paddle switch malfunction —
hibited hibited
Malfunction of both switches Manual mode is prohibited — Manual mode is prohibited

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

[Link]
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
[Link] DTC DETECTION (PART 1)
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Maintain the following condition more than 60 seconds.

Selector lever : “P” position

3. Check DTC.
Is “P1815” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-165, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 3.

Revision: 2015 January TM-164 2015 Q50

 P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

[Link] DTC DETECTION (PART 2) A

With CONSULT
1. Maintain the following condition more than 5 seconds.
B
Selector lever : Manual shift gate (Neutral)
2. Check DTC.
Is “P1815” detected? C
YES >> Go to TM-165, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 4.
[Link] DTC DETECTION (PART 3) TM

With CONSULT
1. Maintain the following condition more than 5 seconds.
E
Selector lever : Manual shift gate [UP side (+ side)]
2. Check DTC.
F
Is “P1815” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-165, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 5.
G
[Link] DTC DETECTION (PART 4)
With CONSULT
1. Maintain the following condition more than 5 seconds. H

Selector lever : Manual shift gate [DOWN side (− side)]

2. Check DTC. I
Is “P1815” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-165, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". J
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281177
K
[Link] INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT L
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “MANU MODE SW”, “NON M MODE SW”, “UP SW LEVER”, “DOWN SW LEVER”, “SFT UP ST
SW”* and “SFT DWN ST SW”* in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
*: With paddle shifter M
3. Check the ON/OFF operations of each monitor item.

Item Monitor Item Condition Status N

Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side ON
MANU MODE SW
Other than the above OFF
O
Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side OFF
NON M-MODE SW
Other than the above ON
Manual mode switch
Selector lever is shifted to + side ON P
UP SW LEVER
Other than the above OFF
Selector lever is shifted to − side ON
DOWN SW LEVER
Other than the above OFF

Revision: 2015 January TM-165 2015 Q50

 P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Item Monitor Item Condition Status
Paddle shifter (up) is pulled ON
SFT UP ST SW
Other than the above OFF
Paddle shifter*
Paddle shifter (down) is pulled ON
SFT DWN ST SW
Other than the above OFF
*: With paddle shifter
Without CONSULT
Drive the vehicle in the manual mode, and then check that the indication of the shift position indicator matches
with the actual gear position.
1. Shift the selector lever to UP side, and then accelerate from 1GR to 7GR.
2. Shift the selector lever to DOWN side, and then decelerate from 7GR to 1GR.
3. *Shift the paddle shifter to UP side, and then accelerate from 1GR to 7GR.
4. *Shift the paddle shifter to DOWN side, and then decelerate from 7GR to 1GR.
*: With paddle shifter
Which item is abnormal?
Manual mode switch>>GO TO 2.
Paddle shifter>>GO TO 7.
[Link] MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between A/T shift selector harness connector terminals.

A/T shift selector

Voltage (Ap-
+ −
Connector prox.)
Terminal
1
2
M7 4 Battery voltage
3
5
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
[Link] MANUAL MODE SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check manual mode switch. Refer to TM-169, "Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] GROUND CIRCUIT (MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector harness connector terminal and ground.

A/T shift selector

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M7 4 Ground Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2015 January TM-166 2015 Q50

 P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

[Link] HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND COMBINATION METER (PART 1) A
1. Disconnect combination meter connector.
2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector harness connector terminals and combination meter harness
connector terminals.
B

A/T shift selector Combination meter

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal C
1 30
2 33
M7 M57 Existed TM
3 32
5 31
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND COMBINATION METER (PART 2) F
Check continuity between A/T shift selector harness connector terminals and ground.

G
A/T shift selector
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
1 H
2
M7 Ground Not existed
3
5 I

Is the inspection result normal?

YES >> GO TO 12. J
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] PADDLE SHIFTER CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. K
2. Disconnect paddle shifter connectors.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between paddle shifter harness connector terminals. L

Paddle shifter
Voltage (Ap-
+ − M
Connector prox.)
Terminal
M65
3 1 Battery voltage N
M66
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8. O
NO >> GO TO 9.
[Link] PADDLE SHIFTER
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. P
2. Check paddle shifter. Refer to TM-169, "Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Up)]", TM-169, "Compo-
nent Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Down)]".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2015 January TM-167 2015 Q50

 P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

[Link] GROUND CIRCUIT (PADDLE SHIFTER CIRCUIT)

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between paddle shifter harness connector terminals and ground.

Paddle shifter
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M65
1 Ground Not existed
M66
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] HARNESS BETWEEN PADDLE SHIFTER AND COMBINATION METER (PART 1)
1. Disconnect combination meter connector.
2. Check continuity between paddle shifter harness connector terminals and combination meter harness
connector terminals.

Paddle shifter Combination meter

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M65 35
3 M57 Existed
M66 34
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] HARNESS BETWEEN PADDLE SHIFTER AND COMBINATION METER (PART 2)
Check continuity between paddle shifter harness connector terminals and ground.

Paddle shifter
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M65
3 Ground Not existed
M66
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] COMBINATION METER
1. Reconnect all the connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Select “M RANGE SW,” “NM RANGE SW,” “AT SFT UP SW,” “AT SFT DWN SW,” “ST SFT UP SW*” and
“ST SFT DWN SW*” in “Data Monitor” in “METER/M&A.”
*: With paddle shifter
4. Check the ON/OFF operations of each monitor item. Refer to MWI-70, "Reference Value".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace control valve & TCM. Refer to TM-216, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-126, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2015 January TM-168 2015 Q50

 P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch) INFOID:0000000011281178

A
[Link] MANUAL MODE SWITCH
Check continuity between A/T shift selector connector terminals.
B

A/T shift selector

Condition Continuity
Terminal C
Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side Existed
1–4
Other than the above Not existed
Selector lever is shifted to − side Existed TM
2–4
Other than the above Not existed
Selector lever is shifted to + side Existed
3–4 E
Other than the above Not existed
Selector lever is shifted to manual shift gate side Not existed
4–5
Other than the above Existed F
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-207, "Removal and Installation". G

Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Up)] INFOID:0000000011281179

H
[Link] PADDLE SHIFTER (UP)
Check continuity between paddle shifter (up) connector terminals.
I
Paddle shifter (up)
Condition Continuity
Terminal
J
Paddle shifter (up) is pulled. Existed
1–3
Other than the above Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? K
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace paddle shifter (up). Refer to TM-214, "Removal and Installation".
L
Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Down)] INFOID:0000000011281180

[Link] PADDLE SHIFTER (DOWN)

M
Check continuity between paddle shifter (down) connector terminals.

Paddle shifter (down)

Condition Continuity N
Terminal
Paddle shifter (down) is pulled. Existed
1–3
Other than the above Not existed O
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
P
NO >> Replace paddle shifter (down). Refer to TM-214, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2015 January TM-169 2015 Q50

 P2713 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID D
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P2713 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID D
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011281181

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
The high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve monitor value is 0.2 A or less
PC SOLENOID D
P2713 when the high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve command value is more
(Pressure Control Solenoid D)
than 0.75 A.

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connector
(Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted)
• High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
FAIL-SAFE

The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
1st fail-safe
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction-
2nd fail-safe
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
Final fail-safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.

Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 -
3 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears of 3 - 4 -
• Locks in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR, 5GR, 6GR or
5 can be performed
7GR —
• The shifting between the gears of 4 - 5 -
• Manual mode is prohibited
6 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 -
3 - 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
[Link]
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
[Link] DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in
“TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive the vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.

BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more

MANU MODE SW : ON

Revision: 2015 January TM-170 2015 Q50

 P2713 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID D
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
GEAR : 3rd
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more A
4. Check DTC.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT”. B
Is “P2713” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-171, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". C
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281182
TM

[Link] CONTROL VALVE & TCM

Replace control valve & TCM. Refer to TM-216, "Removal and Installation". E

>> WORK END

F

Revision: 2015 January TM-171 2015 Q50

 P2722 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID E
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P2722 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID E
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011281183

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
PC SOLENOID E The low brake solenoid valve monitor value is 0.2 A or less when the low brake
P2722
(Pressure Control Solenoid E) solenoid valve command value is more than 0.75 A.

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connector
(Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted)
• Low brake solenoid valve
FAIL-SAFE

The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
1st fail-safe
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction-
2nd fail-safe
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
Final fail-safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.

Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 -
3 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears of 3 - 4 -
• Locks in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR, 5GR, 6GR or
5 can be performed
7GR —
• The shifting between the gears of 4 - 5 -
• Manual mode is prohibited
6 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 -
3 - 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
[Link]
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
[Link] DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in
“TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.

BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more

MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 1st
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more

Revision: 2015 January TM-172 2015 Q50

 P2722 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID E
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
4. Check DTC.
With GST A
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT”.
Is “P2722” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-173, "Diagnosis Procedure". B
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281184
C

[Link] CONTROL VALVE & TCM

TM
Replace control valve & TCM. Refer to TM-216, "Removal and Installation".

>> WORK END E

Revision: 2015 January TM-173 2015 Q50

 P2731 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID F
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P2731 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID F
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011281185

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
PC SOLENOID F The 2346 brake solenoid valve monitor value is 0.2 A or less when the 2346
P2731
(Pressure Control Solenoid F) brake solenoid valve command value is more than 0.75 A.

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connector
(Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted)
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
FAIL-SAFE

The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
1st fail-safe
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction-
2nd fail-safe
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
Final fail-safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.

Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 -
3 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears of 3 - 4 -
• Locks in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR, 5GR, 6GR or
5 can be performed
7GR —
• The shifting between the gears of 4 - 5 -
• Manual mode is prohibited
6 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 -
3 - 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
[Link]
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
[Link] DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in
“TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.

BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more

MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 2nd
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more

Revision: 2015 January TM-174 2015 Q50

 P2731 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID F
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
4. Check DTC.
With GST A
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT”.
Is “P2731” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-175, "Diagnosis Procedure". B
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281186
C

[Link] CONTROL VALVE & TCM

TM
Replace control valve & TCM. Refer to TM-216, "Removal and Installation".

>> WORK END E

Revision: 2015 January TM-175 2015 Q50

 P2807 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID G
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
P2807 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID G
DTC Description INFOID:0000000011281187

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms

DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
PC SOLENOID G The direct clutch solenoid valve monitor value is 0.2 A or less when the direct
P2807
(Pressure Control Solenoid G) clutch solenoid valve command value is more than 0.75 A.

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connector
(Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted)
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
FAIL-SAFE

The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
1st fail-safe
2nd fail-safe early. It shifts to 2nd fail-safe or final fail-safe after the vehicle stopped.
The mode that the vehicle shifts to final fail-safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunction-
2nd fail-safe
ing parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st fail-safe and 2nd fail-safe are not
Final fail-safe used, and then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.

Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe
• Locks in 1GR
• The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 -
3 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears of 3 - 4 -
• Locks in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR, 5GR, 6GR or
5 can be performed
7GR —
• The shifting between the gears of 4 - 5 -
• Manual mode is prohibited
6 can be performed
• The shifting between the gears of 1 - 2 -
3 - 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed
• Manual mode is prohibited

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
[Link]
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before performing the next test.

>> GO TO 2.
[Link] DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” in “Data Monitor” in
“TRANSMISSION”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.

BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more

MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 1st
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more

Revision: 2015 January TM-176 2015 Q50

 P2807 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID G
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
4. Check DTC.
With GST A
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT”.
Is “P2807” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-177, "Diagnosis Procedure". B
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281188
C

[Link] CONTROL VALVE & TCM

TM
Replace control valve & TCM. Refer to TM-216, "Removal and Installation".

>> WORK END E

Revision: 2015 January TM-177 2015 Q50

 MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281189

[Link] TCM POWER SOURCE (PART 1)

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector.
3. Check voltage between A/T assembly harness connector terminal and ground.

+
Voltage
A/T assembly − Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F2 2 Ground Always Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 4.
[Link] TCM POWER SOURCE (PART 2)
Check voltage between A/T assembly harness connector terminals and ground.

+
Voltage
A/T assembly − Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Turn ignition switch ON Battery voltage
1
Turn ignition switch OFF 0V
F2 Ground
Turn ignition switch ON Battery voltage
6
Turn ignition switch OFF 0V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 5.
[Link] TCM GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector terminals and ground.

A/T assembly
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
5
F2 Ground Existed
10
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] MALFUNCTIONING ITEM (PART 1)
Check the following items:
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between battery positive terminal and A/T assembly harness connec-
tor terminal 2. Refer to PG-13, "Wiring Diagram - BATTERY POWER SUPPLY -".
• Battery
• 10A fuse (No.68, fuse and fusible link block). Refer to PG-98, "Fuse and Fusible Link Arrangement".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2015 January TM-178 2015 Q50

 MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

[Link] HARNESS BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND A/T ASSEMBLY A

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and A/T assembly harness connector
B
terminals.

IPDM E/R A/T assembly

Continuity C
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
1
E123 61 F2 Existed
6 TM
4. Also check short circuit in harness.
Is the inspection result normal?
E
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] MALFUNCTIONING ITEM (PART 2) F
Check the following items:
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between ignition switch and IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-57, "Wiring Dia-
gram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY -". G
• 10A fuse (No.51, IPDM E/R). Refer to PG-99, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement".
• IPDM E/R
Is the inspection result normal?
H
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
I

Revision: 2015 January TM-179 2015 Q50

 SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT
Description INFOID:0000000011281190

TCM transmits a shift position signal and a manual mode indicator signal to the combination meter via CAN
communication line. While the vehicle is running, the combination meter displays a shift position on the combi-
nation meter, according to these signals.
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000011281191

[Link] A/T INDICATOR

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1. Start the engine.
2. Check the actual selector lever position (“P”, “R”, “N” and “D”) and the indication of the shift position indi-
cator mutually coincide.
3. Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and then check that the actual gear position and the indication of the
shift position indicator mutually coincide when the selector lever is shifted to “UP (+ side)” or “DOWN (−
side)” side (1GR ⇔ 7GR).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Go to TM-180, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281192

[Link] INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check the actual selector lever position (“P”, “R”, “N” and “D”) and the indication of the “SLCT LVR POSI”
mutually coincide. Refer to TM-74, "Reference Value".
4. Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and then check that the actual gear position and the indication of the
“SLCT LVR POSI” mutually coincide when the selector lever is shifted to the “UP (+ side)” or “DOWN (−
side)” side (1GR ⇔ 7GR). Refer to TM-74, "Reference Value".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO-1 [The actual gear position does not change, or shifting into the manual mode is not possible (no gear
shifting in the manual mode possible). Or the shift position indicator is not indicated.]>>•Check manual
mode switch. Refer to TM-169, "Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch)".
• Check A/T main system (Fail-safe function actuated).
- Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to TM-84, "DTC Index".
NO-2 (The actual gear position changes, but the shift position indicator is not indicated.)>>Perform “Self
Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to TM-84, "DTC Index".
NO-3 (The actual gear position and the indication on the shift position indicator do not coincide.)>>Perform
“Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to TM-84, "DTC Index".
NO-4 (Only a specific position or positions is/are not indicated on the shift position indicator.)>>Check the
combination meter. Refer to MWI-70, "Reference Value".

Revision: 2015 January TM-180 2015 Q50

 SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
A
WITH ICC
WITH ICC : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000011281193
B
[Link] A/T SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (STEP 1)
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” position. C
3. Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal released.
Can the selector lever be shifted to any other position?
TM
YES >> Go to TM-181, "WITH ICC : Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 2.
[Link] A/T SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (STEP 2) E
Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal depressed.
Can the selector lever be shifted to any other position?
YES >> INSPECTION END F
NO >> Go to TM-181, "WITH ICC : Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH ICC : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281194
G
[Link] POWER SOURCE (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. H
2. Disconnect shift lock relay.
3. Check voltage between shift lock relay harness connector terminal and ground.

I
+
Voltage
Shift lock relay − Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal J
Depressed brake pedal. Battery voltage
E34 2 Ground
Released brake pedal. 0V
K
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 9.
L
[Link] GROUND CIRCUIT (PART 1)
Check continuity between shift lock relay harness connector terminal and ground.
M
Shift lock relay
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
N
E34 1 Ground Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. O
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] SHIFT LOCK RELAY
Check shift lock relay. Refer to TM-184, "WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Shift Lock Relay)". P
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] POWER SOURCE (PART 2)
1. Turn ignition switch ON.

Revision: 2015 January TM-181 2015 Q50

 SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
2. Check voltage between shift lock relay harness connector terminal and ground.

+
Voltage
Shift lock relay −
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
E34 5 Ground Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 15.
[Link] HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT LOCK RELAY AND A/T SHIFT SELECTOR (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector.
3. Check continuity between shift lock relay harness connector terminal and A/T shift selector harness con-
nector terminal

Shift lock relay A/T shift selector

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E34 3 M7 8 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT LOCK RELAY AND A/T SHIFT SELECTOR (PART 2)
Check continuity between shift lock relay harness connector terminal and ground.

Shift lock relay

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
E34 3 Ground Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] GROUND CIRCUIT (PART 2)
Check continuity between A/T shift selector harness connector terminal and ground.

A/T shift selector

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M7 4 Ground Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] SHIFT LOCK UNIT
Check shift lock unit. Refer to TM-184, "WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Shift Lock Unit)"
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] POWER SOURCE (PART 3)
1. Disconnect stop lamp switch.
2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch harness connector terminal and ground.

Revision: 2015 January TM-182 2015 Q50

 SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

+ A
Voltage
Stop lamp switch −
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B
E57 1 Ground Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 12. C
NO >> GO TO 10.
[Link] HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND STOP LAMP SWITCH
TM
1. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) connector.
2. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) harness connector terminal and stop lamp switch harness con-
nector terminal.
E
Fuse block (J/B) Stop lamp switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
F
E65 2F E57 1 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 11. G
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] MALFUNCTIONING ITEM (PART 1)
H
Check the following items:
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between battery and fuse block (J/B). Refer to PG-13, "Wiring Dia-
gram - BATTERY POWER SUPPLY -".
• Short circuit in harness between fuse block (J/B) harness connector terminal and stop lamp switch harness I
connector terminal 1.
• Battery
• 10A fuse [No.19, fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-97, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement". J
• Fuse block (J/B)
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident". K
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] STOP LAMP SWITCH MOUNTING POSITION
Check stop lamp switch mounting position. Refer to BR-9, "Inspection and Adjustment". L
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> Adjust stop lamp switch mounting position. M

[Link] STOP LAMP SWITCH

Check stop lamp switch. Refer to TM-185, "WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)". N
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. O
[Link] HARNESS BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND SHIFT LOCK RELAY
1. Check continuity between stop lamp switch harness connector terminal and shift lock relay harness con-
P
nector terminal.

Stop lamp switch Shift lock relay

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E57 2 E34 2 Existed
2. Also check short circuit in harness.

Revision: 2015 January TM-183 2015 Q50

 SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND SHIFT LOCK RELAY (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 minutes or more.
2. Disconnect the sub electric oil pump inverter connector.
3. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) connector.
4. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) harness connector terminal and shift lock relay harness con-
nector terminal.

Fuse block (J/B) Shift lock relay

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E65 11F E34 5 Existed
5. Also check short circuit in harness.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 16.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] MALFUNCTIONING ITEM (PART 2)
Check the following items:
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between ignition switch and fuse block (J/B). Refer to PG-57, "Wiring
Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY -".
• 10A fuse [No.12, fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-97, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement".
• Fuse block (J/B)
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Shift Lock Unit) INFOID:0000000011281195

[Link] SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID

Apply voltage to terminals 8 and 4 of A/T shift selector connector, and check that shift lock unit is activated.
CAUTION:
Connect the fuse between the terminals when applying the voltage.

A/T shift selector

+ (fuse) − Condition Status
Terminal
• Selector lever in “P” position.
8 4 Shift lock unit operates
• Apply 12 V direct current between terminals 8 and 4.
Can the lock plate be moved up and down?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace A/T shift selector assembly. Refer to TM-207, "Removal and Installation".
WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Shift Lock Relay) INFOID:0000000011281196

[Link] SHIFT LOCK RELAY

Check continuity between shift lock relay terminals.
CAUTION:
Connect the fuse between the terminals when applying the voltage.

Revision: 2015 January TM-184 2015 Q50

 SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

Shift lock relay A

Condition Continuity
Terminal
Apply 12 V direct current between terminals 1 and 2. Existed
3–4 B
OFF Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END C
NO >> Replace shift lock relay.
WITH ICC : Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) INFOID:0000000011281197
TM
[Link] STOP LAMP SWITCH
Check continuity between stop lamp switch connector terminals. E

Stop lamp switch

Condition Continuity
Terminal F
Brake pedal depressed Existed
1–2
Brake pedal released Not existed
G
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-21, "Exploded View".
H
WITHOUT ICC
WITHOUT ICC : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000011281198

I
[Link] A/T SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (STEP 1)
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” position. J
3. Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal released.
Can the selector lever be shifted to any other position?
YES >> Go to TM-185, "WITHOUT ICC : Diagnosis Procedure". K
NO >> GO TO 2.
[Link] A/T SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (STEP 2) L
Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal depressed.
Can the selector lever be shifted to any other position?
YES >> INSPECTION END M
NO >> Go to TM-185, "WITHOUT ICC : Diagnosis Procedure".
WITHOUT ICC : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281199
N
[Link] POWER SOURCE (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
O
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between stop lamp switch harness connector terminal and ground.
P
+
Voltage
Stop lamp switch −
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
E57 1 Ground Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?

Revision: 2015 January TM-185 2015 Q50

 SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 8.
[Link] STOP LAMP SWITCH MOUNTING POSITION
Check stop lamp switch mounting position. Refer to BR-9, "Inspection and Adjustment".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Adjust stop lamp switch mounting position.
[Link] STOP LAMP SWITCH
Check stop lamp switch. Refer to TM-187, "WITHOUT ICC : Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] HARNESS BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND SHIFT SELECTOR (PART 1)
1. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector.
2. Check continuity between stop lamp switch harness connector terminal and A/T shift selector harness
connector terminal.

Stop lamp switch A/T shift selector

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
E57 2 M7 8 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] HARNESS BETWEEN STOP LAMP SWITCH AND SHIFT SELECTOR (PART 2)
Check continuity between stop lamp switch harness connector terminal and ground.

Stop lamp switch

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
E57 2 Ground Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between A/T shift selector harness connector terminal and ground.

A/T shift selector

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M7 4 Ground Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] SHIFT LOCK UNIT
Check shift lock unit. Refer to TM-187, "WITHOUT ICC : Component Inspection (Shift Lock Unit)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] HARNESS BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK (J/B) AND STOP LAMP SWITCH
Revision: 2015 January TM-186 2015 Q50
 SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 minutes or more.
2. Disconnect the sub electric oil pump inverter connector. A
3. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) connector.
4. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) harness connector terminal and stop lamp switch harness con-
nector terminal.
B

Fuse block (J/B) Stop lamp switch

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal C
E65 11F E57 1 Existed
5. Short circuit in harness between fuse block (J/B) harness connector terminal 94 and stop lamp switch har-
ness connector terminal 1. TM
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. E
[Link] MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items: F
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between ignition switch and fuse block (J/B). Refer to PG-57, "Wiring
Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY -".
• 10A fuse [No.12, fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-97, "Fuse, Connector and Terminal Arrangement".
• Fuse block (J/B) G
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. H

WITHOUT ICC : Component Inspection (Shift Lock Unit) INFOID:0000000011281200

I
[Link] SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
Apply voltage to terminals 8 and 4 of A/T shift selector connector, and check that shift lock unit is activated.
CAUTION: J
Connect the fuse between the terminals when applying the voltage.

A/T shift selector K

+ (fuse) − Condition Status
Terminal
L
• Selector lever in “P” position.
8 4 Shift lock unit operates
• Apply 12 V direct current between terminals 8 and 4.
Can the lock plate be moved up and down?
M
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace A/T shift selector assembly. Refer to TM-205, "Exploded View".
WITHOUT ICC : Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) INFOID:0000000011281201 N

[Link] STOP LAMP SWITCH

Check continuity between stop lamp switch connector terminals. O

Stop lamp switch

Condition Continuity P
Terminal
Brake pedal depressed Existed
1–2
Brake pedal released Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-21, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2015 January TM-187 2015 Q50

 SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
Description INFOID:0000000011281202

Indicates selector lever position.

Component Function Check INFOID:0000000011281203

[Link] SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR (PART 1)

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check that each position indicator lamp of the selector lever position indicator turns on when shifting the
selector lever from “P” to “M” position.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Go to TM-188, "Diagnosis Procedure".
[Link] SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR (PART 2)
Check that the night illumination of the selector lever position indicator turns on when setting the lighting
switch in 1st position.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Go to TM-188, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000011281204

[Link] MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Which item is abnormal?
Position indicator lamp>> GO TO 2.
Illumination lamp>> GO TO 9.
[Link] POWER SOURCE (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between A/T shift selector harness connector terminal and ground.

+
A/T shift selector − Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M7 10 Ground Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 6.
[Link] GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector harness connector terminal and ground.

A/T shift selector

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M7 4 Ground Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.

Revision: 2015 January TM-188 2015 Q50

 SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

[Link] SHIFT POSITION SWITCH A

1. Disconnect selector lever position indicator side connector of shift position switch.
2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector connector terminals and selector lever position indicator side
connector terminals of shift position switch.
B

Selector lever position indicator side

A/T shift selector connector
connector of shift position switch Condition Continuity
C
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
7 Existed
Selector lever in “D” position.
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10, 11 Not existed TM
4
9 Existed
Selector lever in “M” position.
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11 Not existed
E
2, 6 Selector lever in “N” and “M” Existed
3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11 position. Not existed
M7 M221
3, 6 Existed F
Selector lever in “D” position.
2, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11 Not existed
10
4, 6 Existed
Selector lever in “R” position. G
2, 3, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11 Not existed
5, 6 Existed
Selector lever in “P” position.
2, 3, 4, 7, 9, 10, 11 Not existed
H
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I
[Link] SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
Check selector lever position indicator. Refer to TM-190, "Component Inspection (Selector Lever Position Indi-
cator)". J
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
K
NO >> Replace damaged parts.
[Link] HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND BCM (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. L
2. Disconnect BCM connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T shift selector harness connector terminal and BCM harness connector ter-
minal. M

A/T shift selector BCM

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal N
M7 10 M14 69 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
O
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND BCM (PART 2) P
Check continuity between A/T shift selector harness connector terminal and ground.

A/T shift selector

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M7 10 Ground Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?

Revision: 2015 January TM-189 2015 Q50

 SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] BCM INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL
Check BCM input/output signal. Refer to BCS-35, "Reference Value".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
[Link] POWER SOURCE (PART 2)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals.

A/T shift selector

Voltage
+ − Condition
Connector (Approx.)
Terminal
M7 7 9 Lighting switch 1ST Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Check illumination circuit. Refer to INL-38, "Wiring Diagram".
[Link] SHIFT POSITION SWITCH
1. Disconnect selector lever position indicator side connector of shift position switch.
2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector connector terminals and selector lever position indicator side
connector terminals of shift position switch.

Selector lever position indicator side

A/T shift selector
connector of shift position switch Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
10 Existed
7
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 11 Not existed
M7 M221
11 Existed
9
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
Component Inspection (Selector Lever Position Indicator) INFOID:0000000011281205

[Link] SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR

Check that selector lever position indicator lamps turn on.
CAUTION:
Connect the fuse between the terminals when applying the voltage.

Revision: 2015 January TM-190 2015 Q50

 SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

Selector lever position indicator A

+ (fuse) − Condition Status
Terminal
B
Apply 12 V direct current be-
2 “N” position indicator lamp turns on.
tween terminals 2 and 7.
Apply 12 V direct current be-
3 “D” position indicator lamp turns on. C
tween terminals 3 and 7.
7
Apply 12 V direct current be-
4 “R” position indicator lamp turns on.
tween terminals 4 and 7.
TM
Apply 12 V direct current be-
5 “P” position indicator lamp turns on.
tween terminals 5 and 7.
Apply 12 V direct current be-
6 9
tween terminals 6 and 9.
“M” mode indicator lamp turns on. E
Apply 12 V direct current be-
10 11 Illumination lamp turns on.
tween terminals 10 and 11.
F
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace selector lever position indicator. Refer to TM-210, "Removal and Installation".
G

Revision: 2015 January TM-191 2015 Q50

 SYSTEM SYMPTOM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000011281206

• The diagnostics item numbers show the sequence for inspection. Inspect in order from item 1.
• Perform diagnoses of symptom table 1 before symptom table 2.
SYMPTOM TABLE 1

Diagnostic item

High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve

Accelerator pedal position sensor

Torque converter solenoid valve

Line pressure solenoid valve
A/T fluid temperature sensor

Anti-interlock solenoid valve

Direct clutch solenoid valve
Transmission range switch

Front brake solenoid valve

Input clutch solenoid valve

2346 brake solenoid valve

Low brake solenoid valve
Output speed sensor
Vehicle speed signal

CAN communication
Manual mode switch
Engine speed signal
Input speed sensor
Symptom

Stop lamp switch

Control linkage

Battery voltage

Starter relay
TM-103

TM-157
TM-155
TM-120

TM-178

TM-164

TM-146
TM-142
TM-172
TM-153
TM-170
TM-149
TM-176
TM-174
TM-147
TM-109
TM-107
TM-118

TM-116
TM-113

TM-111

BR-9
Shift point is high in “D” position. 1 2 3
Shift point is low in “D” position. 1 2
→ “D” position 4 7 6 6 5 3 2 3 1
→ “R” position 4 7 6 6 5 3 2 1
1GR ⇔ 2GR 4 2 5 4 4 3 1
2GR ⇔ 3GR 4 2 5 4 4 3 1
3GR ⇔ 4GR 4 2 5 4 4 3 3 1

Driving 4GR ⇔ 5GR 4 2 5 4 4 3 3 1

perfor- When
Large 5GR ⇔ 6GR 4 2 5 4 4 3 3 1
mance shifting
shock
Poor gears 6GR ⇔ 7GR 4 2 5 4 4 3 3 1
perfor- Downshift when
mance accelerator ped- 3 2 4 3 3 1
al is depressed
Upshift when ac-
celerator pedal 3 2 4 3 3 1
is released
Lock-up 4 2 4 4 4 3 1
Judder Lock-up 2 1 1 4 3
In “R” position 2 1
In “N” position 2 1
Strange noise
In “D” position 2 1
Engine at idle 2 1

Revision: 2015 January TM-192 2015 Q50

 tion
Func-

trouble
Gear

change
does no

tion

Revision: 2015 January

“M” posi-
“D” position
Symptom
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

2GR → 1GR
3GR → 2GR
4GR → 3GR
5GR → 4GR
6GR → 7GR
5GR → 6GR
4GR → 5GR
3GR → 4GR
2GR → 3GR
1GR → 2GR

6GR ⇔ 7GR
5GR ⇔ 6GR
4GR ⇔ 5GR
3GR ⇔ 4GR
2GR ⇔ 3GR
1GR ⇔ 2GR
Locks in 7GR
Locks in 6GR
Locks in 5GR
Locks in 4GR
Locks in 3GR
Locks in 2GR
Locks in 1GR

Does not lock-up

TM-103 Control linkage

3
3
3
3
3
3
2
1

2
1
TM-118 Output speed sensor
TM-157 Vehicle speed signal
TM-155 Accelerator pedal position sensor

TM-193
TM-120 Engine speed signal
TM-116 Input speed sensor

3 3
3 3
3 3
3 3
3 3
3 3
2 2
TM-113 A/T fluid temperature sensor
SYSTEM SYMPTOM

1
TM-178 Battery voltage

2 2 2 4 5
1
1
TM-111 Transmission range switch

3 2
3 2
3 2
3 2
3 2
3 2
TM-164 Manual mode switch
BR-9 Stop lamp switch
TM-146 Line pressure solenoid valve
TM-142 Torque converter solenoid valve
Diagnostic item

1
TM-172 Low brake solenoid valve
1

TM-153 Front brake solenoid valve

1
TM-170 High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
1

1
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
1

TM-149 Input clutch solenoid valve

3 3 3 3 3 3 3
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
1
1
1
1
1

TM-176 Direct clutch solenoid valve

1

3
3
3
3
3
3
2
1
1
1

TM-174 2346 brake solenoid valve

3
3
3
3
3
3
2
1
1

TM-147 Anti-interlock solenoid valve

TM-109 Starter relay

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
[7AT: RE7R01A]

TM-107 CAN communication

2015 Q50
I

L
F

P
K
E
B
A

N
H
C

O
G

M
TM
 ble
Func-
tion trou-
Poor
shifting

Revision: 2015 January

not
En-
Slip

gine

work
does
brake
Symptom

ing

“M”

tion
tion
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

shift-

posi-
gears
When

2GR → 1GR
3GR → 2GR
4GR → 3GR
5GR → 4GR
6GR → 5GR
7GR → 6GR
6GR ⇔ 7GR
5GR ⇔ 6GR
4GR ⇔ 5GR
3GR ⇔ 4GR
2GR ⇔ 3GR
1GR ⇔ 2GR

“D” position → “M” posi-

TM-103 Control linkage

5
5
5
5
5
5
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
TM-118 Output speed sensor
TM-157 Vehicle speed signal
TM-155 Accelerator pedal position sensor

TM-194
TM-120 Engine speed signal
TM-116 Input speed sensor

5 5 6
5 5 6
5 5 6
5 5 6
5 5 6
5 5 6
5 5 6
3 3 4
3 3 4
3 3 4
3 3 4
3 3 4
3 3 4

TM-113 A/T fluid temperature sensor

SYSTEM SYMPTOM

TM-178 Battery voltage

TM-111 Transmission range switch

4 2
4 2
4 2
4 2
4 2
4 2
4 2 TM-164 Manual mode switch
BR-9 Stop lamp switch

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2

TM-146 Line pressure solenoid valve

TM-142 Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
Diagnostic item

3
2

TM-172 Low brake solenoid valve

3
3
3
2

TM-153 Front brake solenoid valve

3
3
2

TM-170 High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve

3
2

TM-149 Input clutch solenoid valve

3
2

TM-176 Direct clutch solenoid valve

3
3
3 3
3
2
2 2
2
2

TM-174 2346 brake solenoid valve

3
2

TM-147 Anti-interlock solenoid valve

TM-109 Starter relay
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

TM-107 CAN communication

[7AT: RE7R01A]

2015 Q50
 SYSTEM SYMPTOM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Diagnostic item
A

High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve

Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
B

Accelerator pedal position sensor

Line pressure solenoid valve

A/T fluid temperature sensor

Anti-interlock solenoid valve

Direct clutch solenoid valve
Transmission range switch

Front brake solenoid valve

Input clutch solenoid valve

2346 brake solenoid valve

Low brake solenoid valve
C

Output speed sensor

Manual mode switch

CAN communication
Vehicle speed signal

Engine speed signal

Input speed sensor
Symptom

Stop lamp switch

Control linkage

Battery voltage
TM

Starter relay
E

TM-103

TM-157
TM-155
TM-120

TM-178

TM-164

TM-146
TM-142
TM-172
TM-153
TM-170
TM-149
TM-176
TM-174
TM-147
TM-109
TM-107
TM-118

TM-116
TM-113

TM-111

BR-9
F
With selector le-
ver in “D” posi-
tion, 5 3 3 3 4 2 2 2 1 G
acceleration is
extremely poor.
With selector le- H
ver in “R” posi-
tion, 5 3 3 3 4 2 2 2 1
acceleration is
extremely poor. I
While starting off
by accelerating
3 3 3 4 2 2 2 1
in 1GR, engine
J
races.
While accelerat-
ing in 2GR, en- 3 3 3 4 2 2 2 2 1
gine races. K
Poor While accelerat-
Func-
power ing in 3GR, en- 3 3 3 4 2 2 2 2 1
tion trou- Slip
trans- gine races. L
ble
mission
While accelerat-
ing in 4GR, en- 3 3 3 4 2 2 2 2 1
gine races. M
While accelerat-
ing in 5GR, en- 3 3 3 4 2 2 2 2 2 1
gine races.
N
While accelerat-
ing in 6GR, en- 3 3 3 4 2 2 2 2 2 1
gine races.
While accelerat-
O
ing in 7GR, en- 3 3 3 4 2 2 2 2 2 1
gine races.
Lock-up 3 3 3 4 2 2 1 P
No creep at all. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Extremely large
1
creep.

Revision: 2015 January TM-195 2015 Q50

 SYSTEM SYMPTOM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

Diagnostic item

High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve

Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
Accelerator pedal position sensor

Line pressure solenoid valve

A/T fluid temperature sensor

Anti-interlock solenoid valve

Direct clutch solenoid valve
Transmission range switch

Input clutch solenoid valve

Front brake solenoid valve

2346 brake solenoid valve

Low brake solenoid valve
Output speed sensor

Manual mode switch

CAN communication
Vehicle speed signal

Engine speed signal

Input speed sensor
Symptom

Stop lamp switch

Control linkage

Battery voltage

Starter relay
TM-103

TM-157
TM-155
TM-120

TM-178

TM-164

TM-146
TM-142
TM-172
TM-153
TM-170
TM-149
TM-176
TM-174
TM-147
TM-109
TM-107
TM-118

TM-116
TM-113

TM-111

BR-9
Vehicle cannot run in all
3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
position.
Driving is not possible in
3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
“D” position.
Driving is not possible in
3 2 1 1 1
“R” position.
Power transmis-
Engine stall 4 5 5 6 3 2 1
sion cannot be
performed Engine stalls when selec-
tor lever shifted “N” → “D” 4 5 5 3 2 1
or “R”.
Engine does not start in
3 1 2 1
“N” or “P” position.
Function Engine starts in position
3 2 1
trouble other than “N” or “P”.
Vehicle does not enter
1 2
parking condition.
Parking condition is not
1 2
cancelled.
Vehicle runs with A/T in
1 2
“P” position.
Poor operation
Vehicle moves forward
1 2
with the “R” position.
Vehicle runs with A/T in
1 2
“N” position.
Vehicle moves backward
1 2
with the “D” position.

SYMPTOM TABLE 2

Revision: 2015 January TM-196 2015 Q50

 SYSTEM SYMPTOM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

Diagnostic item A

High and low reverse clutch

B

2nd one-way clutch

Parking component
1st one-way clutch
Torque converter

Reverse brake

control valve
Direct clutch
Front brake

Input clutch

2346 brake
Low brake*
C

Oil pump
Symptom

gear
TM

TM-246 (AWD)
TM-220 (2WD)
TM-306

TM-246

TM-246

TM-246

TM-328

TM-318

TM-330

TM-306

TM-246

TM-246

TM-323

TM-246

TM-215
E

Shift point is high in “D” position.

F
Shift point is low in “D” position.
→ “D” position 1 2 2
→ “R” position 1 1 2 G
1GR ⇔ 2GR 1 2
2GR ⇔ 3GR 1 2
H
3GR ⇔ 4GR 2 1 2
Driving When 4GR ⇔ 5GR 1 1 2
perfor- Large shift-
mance 5GR ⇔ 6GR 1 1 2 I
shock ing
Poor gears 6GR ⇔ 7GR 1 1 2
perfor-
mance Downshift when accel-
erator pedal is de- 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 J
pressed
Upshift when accelera-
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
tor pedal is released K
Lock-up 1 2
Judder Lock-up 1 2
In “R” position 1 1 1 1 2
L

In “N” position 1 1 1 2
Strange noise
In “D” position 1 1 1 1 2
M
Engine at idle 1 1 1 2
*: Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-23, "TRANSMISSION : Cross-Sectional
View". N

Revision: 2015 January TM-197 2015 Q50

 SYSTEM SYMPTOM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

Diagnostic item

High and low reverse clutch

2nd one-way clutch

Parking component
1st one-way clutch
Torque converter

Reverse brake

control valve
Direct clutch
Front brake

Input clutch

2346 brake
Low brake*
Oil pump
Symptom

gear

TM-246 (AWD)
TM-220 (2WD)
TM-306

TM-246

TM-246

TM-246

TM-328

TM-318

TM-330

TM-306

TM-246

TM-246

TM-323

TM-246

TM-215
Locks in 1GR 1 1 1 2
Locks in 2GR 1
Locks in 3GR 1
Locks in 4GR 1
Locks in 5GR 1
Locks in 6GR 1
Locks in 7GR 1
1GR → 2GR 1 1 1 2

“D” posi- 2GR → 3GR 1 2

tion 3GR → 4GR 2 1 1 1 2
4GR → 5GR 1 1 2
Func- Gear 5GR → 6GR 1 2
tion does no
trouble change 6GR → 7GR 2 1 1 1 2
5GR → 4GR 1 2
4GR → 3GR 2 1 2
3GR → 2GR 1 1 2
2GR → 1GR 1 1 1 2
Does not lock-up 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
1GR ⇔ 2GR 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
2GR ⇔ 3GR 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2

“M” posi- 3GR ⇔ 4GR 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2

tion 4GR ⇔ 5GR 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
5GR ⇔ 6GR 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
6GR ⇔ 7GR 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
*: Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-23, "TRANSMISSION : Cross-Sectional
View".

Revision: 2015 January TM-198 2015 Q50

 SYSTEM SYMPTOM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

Diagnostic item A

High and low reverse clutch

B

2nd one-way clutch

Parking component
1st one-way clutch
Torque converter

Reverse brake

control valve
Direct clutch
Front brake

Input clutch

2346 brake
Low brake*
C

Oil pump
Symptom

gear
TM

TM-246 (AWD)
TM-220 (2WD)
TM-306

TM-246

TM-246

TM-246

TM-328

TM-318

TM-330

TM-306

TM-246

TM-246

TM-323

TM-246

TM-215
E

1GR ⇔ 2GR 1 1 1 2
F
2GR ⇔ 3GR 1 1 2
When 3GR ⇔ 4GR 1 2 1 2
Slip shifting
gears 4GR ⇔ 5GR 1 1 1 2 G
5GR ⇔ 6GR 1 1 1 2
6GR ⇔ 7GR 1 1 1 2
Func- Poor H
tion shift- “D” position → “M” position 1 1 1 1 1 2
trouble ing
7GR → 6GR 1 1 1 2
En-
6GR → 5GR 1 1 1 2 I
gine
brake “M” posi- 5GR → 4GR 1 1 1 2
does tion 4GR → 3GR 1 2 1 2
not J
work 3GR → 2GR 1 1 1 1 1 2
2GR → 1GR 1 1 1 1 2

Revision: 2015 January TM-199 2015 Q50

 SYSTEM SYMPTOM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Diagnostic item

High and low reverse clutch

2nd one-way clutch

Parking component
1st one-way clutch
Torque converter

Reverse brake

control valve
Direct clutch
Front brake

Input clutch
Low brake*

2346 brake
Oil pump
Symptom

gear

TM-246 (AWD)
TM-220 (2WD)
TM-306

TM-246

TM-246

TM-246

TM-328

TM-318

TM-330

TM-306

TM-246

TM-246

TM-323

TM-246

TM-215
With selector lever
in “D” position, ac-
1 1 2 1 1 2
celeration is ex-
tremely poor.
With selector lever
in “R” position, ac-
1 1 1 1 1 1 2
celeration is ex-
tremely poor.
While starting off
by accelerating in
1 1 2 1 1 1 2
1GR, engine rac-
es.
While accelerating
in 2GR, engine 1 2 1 1 1 2
races.
Poor While accelerating
pow- in 3GR, engine 1 2 1 1 1 2
Func-
er races.
tion Slip
trans-
trouble While accelerating
mis-
sion in 4GR, engine 1 1 1 1 1 2
races.
While accelerating
in 5GR, engine 1 1 1 1 1 2
races.
While accelerating
in 6GR, engine 1 1 1 1 1 2
races.
While accelerating
in 7GR, engine 1 1 1 1 2
races.
Lock-up 1 1 1 2
No creep at all. 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1
Extremely large
1
creep.
*: Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-23, "TRANSMISSION : Cross-Sectional
View".

Revision: 2015 January TM-200 2015 Q50

 SYSTEM SYMPTOM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A]

Diagnostic item A

High and low reverse clutch

B

2nd one-way clutch

Parking component
1st one-way clutch
Torque converter

Reverse brake

control valve
Direct clutch
Front brake

Input clutch

2346 brake
Low brake*
C

Oil pump
Symptom

gear
TM

TM-246 (AWD)
TM-220 (2WD)
TM-306

TM-246

TM-246

TM-246

TM-328

TM-318

TM-330

TM-306

TM-246

TM-246

TM-323

TM-246

TM-215
E

Vehicle cannot run in all position. 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1

F
Driving is not possible in “D” posi-
1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1
tion.
Driving is not possible in “R” posi-
1 1 1 1 1 2 1 G
tion.
Power trans-
Engine stall 1
mission cannot
be performed Engine stalls when selector lever H
1
shifted “N” → “D” or “R”.
Engine does not start in “N” or “P”
1
position.
I
Engine starts in position other
Function than “N” or “P”.
trouble
Vehicle does not enter parking J
1
condition.
Parking condition is not can-
1
celled.
K
Vehicle runs with A/T in “P” posi-
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1
tion.
Poor operation
Vehicle moves forward with the
2 1 1 1 1 1 2 L
“R” position.
Vehicle runs with A/T in “N” posi-
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
tion.
M
Vehicle moves backward with the
1 2
“D” position.
*: Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to TM-23, "TRANSMISSION : Cross-Sectional
View". N

Revision: 2015 January TM-201 2015 Q50

 A/T FLUID
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [7AT: RE7R01A]

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
A/T FLUID
Inspection INFOID:0000000011281207

FLUID LEAKAGE
• Check transaxle surrounding area (oil seal and plug etc.) for fluid
leakage.
• If anything is found, repair or replace damaged parts and adjust A/
T fluid level. Refer to TM-204, "Adjustment".

JSDIA1912ZZ

Changing INFOID:0000000011281208

Recommended fluid and fluid capacity : Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants".
CAUTION:
• Use only recommended ATF. Never mix with other ATF.
• Using ATF other than recommended ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and A/T durability,
and may damage the A/T, which is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.
• When filling ATF, be careful not to scatter heat generating parts such as exhaust.
1. Step 1
a. Install the O-ring (315268E000) (A) to the charging pipe
(310811EA5A) (B).

JSDIA1334ZZ

2. Step 2
a. Use CONSULT to check that the ATF temperature is 40°C (104°F) or less.
b. Lift up the vehicle.
c. Remove the drain plug from the oil pan, and then drain the ATF.
d. When the ATF starts to drip, temporarily tighten the drain plug to the oil pan.
NOTE:
Never replace drain plug and drain plug gasket with new ones yet.
e. Remove overflow plug from oil pan.

Revision: 2015 January TM-202 2015 Q50

 A/T FLUID
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [7AT: RE7R01A]
f. Install the charging pipe (A) to the overflow plug hole.
CAUTION: A
Tighten the charging pipe by hand.
g. Install the bucket pump hose (B) to the charging pipe.
CAUTION: B
Insert the bucket pump hose all the way to the end of the
charging pipe.
h. Fill approximately 3 liters (3-1/8 US qt, 2-5/8 lmp qt) of the ATF.
C
i. Remove the bucket pump hose to remove the charging pipe,
and then temporarily tighten the overflow plug to the oil pan.
CAUTION: JSDIA1335ZZ

Quickly perform the procedure to avoid ATF leakage from TM

the oil pan.
j. Lift down the vehicle.
E
k. Start the engine and wait for approximately 3 minutes.
l. Stop the engine.
3. Step 3
F
a. Repeat “Step 2”.
4. Final Step
a. Use CONSULT to check that the ATF temperature is 40°C (104°F) or less. G
b. Lift up the vehicle.
c. Remove the drain plug from the oil pan, and then drain the ATF.
d. When the ATF starts to drip, tighten the drain plug to the oil pan to the specified torque. Refer to TM-215, H
"Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Never reuse drain plug and drain plug gasket. I
e. Remove overflow plug from oil pan.
f. Install the charging pipe (A) to the overflow plug hole.
CAUTION: J
Tighten the charging pipe by hand.
g. Install the bucket pump hose (B) to the charging pipe.
CAUTION: K
Insert the bucket pump hose all the way to the end of the
charging pipe.
h. Fill approximately 3 liters (3-1/8 US qt, 2-5/8 lmp qt) of the ATF.
L
i. Remove the bucket pump hose to remove the charging pipe,
and then temporarily tighten the overflow plug to the oil pan.
CAUTION: JSDIA1335ZZ

Quickly perform the procedure to avoid ATF leakage from M

the oil pan.
j. Lift down the vehicle.
k. Start the engine. N
l. Make the ATF temperature approximately 40°C (104°F).
NOTE:
The ATF level is greatly affected by the temperature. Always check the ATF temperature on “ATF TEMP O
1” of “Data Monitor” using CONSULT.
m. Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake.
n. Shift the selector lever through each gear position. Leave selector lever in “P” position. P
o. Lift up the vehicle when the ATF temperature reaches 40°C (104°F), and remove the overflow plug from
the oil pan.
p. When the ATF starts to drip, tighten the overflow plug to the oil pan to the specified torque. Refer to TM-
215, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Never reuse overflow plug.

Revision: 2015 January TM-203 2015 Q50

 A/T FLUID
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Adjustment INFOID:0000000011281209

Recommended fluid and fluid capacity : Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants".
CAUTION:
• Use only recommended ATF. Never mix with other ATF.
• Using ATF other than recommended ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and A/T durability,
and may damage the A/T, which is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.
• When filling ATF, be careful not to scatter heat generating parts such as exhaust.
• Always maintain the ATF temperature within between 35°C (95°F) and 45°C (113°F) while checking
with CONSULT when the ATF level adjustment is performed.
1. Install the O-ring (315268E000) (A) to the charging pipe
(310811EA5A) (B).
2. Start the engine.
3. Make the ATF temperature approximately 40°C (104°F).
NOTE:
The ATF level is greatly affected by the temperature. Always
check the ATF temperature on “ATF TEMP 1” of “Data Monitor”
using CONSULT.
4. Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake.
5. Shift the selector lever through each gear position. Leave selec- JSDIA1334ZZ
tor lever in “P” position.
6. Lift up the vehicle.
7. Check the ATF leakage from transmission.
8. Remove overflow plug from oil pan.
9. Install the charging pipe (A) to the overflow plug hole.
CAUTION:
Tighten the charging pipe by hand.
10. Install the bucket pump hose (B) to the charging pipe.
CAUTION:
Insert the bucket pump hose all the way to the end of the
charging pipe.
11. Fill approximately 0.5 liters (1/2 US qt, 1/2 lmp qt) of the ATF.
12. Check that the ATF leaks when removing the charging pipe and
the bucket pump hose. If the ATF does not leak, refill the ATF.
JSDIA1335ZZ
13. When the ATF starts to drip, tighten the overflow plug to the oil
pan to the specified torque. Refer to TM-215, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Never reuse overflow plug.

Revision: 2015 January TM-204 2015 Q50

 A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A

A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011281210
B

2WD Models
C

TM

P
JSDIA4240GB

Selector lever knob Lock pin Adapter

A/T shift selector assembly Dust cover plate Dust cover
Control rod Pivot pin Washer
Collar Snap pin Insulator

Revision: 2015 January TM-205 2015 Q50

 A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: Apply multi-purpose grease

AWD Models

JSDIA4241GB

Selector lever knob Lock pin Adapter

A/T shift selector assembly Dust cover plate Dust cover
Control rod Pivot pin Washer
Collar Snap pin Insulator
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

Revision: 2015 January TM-206 2015 Q50

 A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
A
: Apply multi-purpose grease

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011281211

B
REMOVAL
1. Shift the selector lever to “P” position.
C
2. Remove nut ( ) and remove the control rod from the lower
lever of A/T shift selector assembly.
TM
: 2WD models
: AWD models
: Vehicle front E

JSDIA4254ZZ
J
3. Shift the selector lever to “N” position.
4. Remove the top of shift boot from the selector lever knob
and slide the shift boot down. K

JSDIA4248ZZ

N
5. Pull out the lock pin and remove shift selector knob from the
selector lever.
6. Remove center console assembly. Refer to IP-24, "Removal and O
Installation".
7. Remove rear floor duct 2. Refer to VTL-13, "REAR FLOOR
DUCT 2 : Removal and Installation". (With rear ventilator grille)
P
8. Shift the selector lever to “P” position.
CAUTION:
Be sure to move selector lever with the selector lever knob
installed.
JSDIA4249ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-207 2015 Q50

 A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
9. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector .

JSDIA4250ZZ

10. Remove A/T shift selector assembly mounting bolts ( ).

JSDIA4251ZZ

11. Remove harness clips from A/T shift selector assembly.

12. Remove A/T shift selector assembly from the vehicle.
13. Remove snap pin, washers, insulator, collar and pivot pin from
A/T shift selector assembly.
14. Remove dust cover and dust cover plate from A/T shift selector
assembly.
15. Remove adapter from A/T shift selector assembly.

JSDIA4253ZZ

INSTALLATION
Note the following and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Apply multi-purpose grease on the pin surface (that slides after
installing a collar) of the pivot pin.

JSDIA3178ZZ

• Refer to the followings when installing the selector lever knob to the A/T shift selector assembly.

Revision: 2015 January TM-208 2015 Q50

 A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
1. Install the lock pin to the selector lever knob.
2. Insert the shift lever knob into the shift lever until it clicks. A
CAUTION:
• Install it straight, and never tap or apply any shock to
install it.
B
• Never press selector button.

JSDIA4252ZZ

TM
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000011281212

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION E

Check A/T position after adjusting A/T position. Refer to TM-103, "Inspection and Adjustment".
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Adjust A/T position. Refer to TM-103, "Inspection and Adjustment". F

Revision: 2015 January TM-209 2015 Q50

 SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011281213

JSDIA4501ZZ

Shift lock cover Selector lever position indicator

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011281214

REMOVAL
1. Remove console finisher assembly. Refer to IP-24, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove console pocket assembly from console finisher assembly. Refer to IP-23, "Exploded View".
3. Remove selector lever position indicator from console finisher assembly.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Inspection INFOID:0000000011281215

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

Check selector lever position indicator function. Refer to TM-188, "Component Function Check".

Revision: 2015 January TM-210 2015 Q50

 CONTROL ROD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
CONTROL ROD
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011281216

2WD Models B

TM

G
JSDIA4255GB

Transmission assembly Manual lever Lock washer

H
Snap pin Conical washer Plain washer
Collar Insulator Control rod
A/T shift selector assembly I
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Apply multi-purpose grease J

AWD Models

JSDIA4256GB

P
Transmission assembly Manual lever Lock washer
Snap pin Conical washer Plain washer
Collar Insulator Control rod
A/T shift selector assembly

Revision: 2015 January TM-211 2015 Q50

 CONTROL ROD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Apply multi-purpose grease

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011281217

REMOVAL
1. Shift the selector lever to “P” position.
2. Remove nut ( ) and remove the control rod from the lower
lever of A/T shift selector assembly.

: 2WD models
: AWD models
: Vehicle front

JSDIA4254ZZ

3. Remove nut ( ) and remove the manual lever (with control

rod) from transmission assembly.

JSDIA4257ZZ

CAUTION:
When loosening manual lever mounting nut, set manual
lever in “N” position and fix manual lever to prevent it from
moving.

: D position
: N position
: R position
: P position
: Vehicle front
JSDIA4258ZZ

4. Remove snap pin, control rod, conical washer, plain washers,

collar, and insulator from manual lever.

Revision: 2015 January TM-212 2015 Q50

 CONTROL ROD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
INSTALLATION
Note the following and install in the reverse order of removal. A
CAUTION:
• Apply multi-purpose grease on the pin surface (that slides
after installing collar) of the tip of the control rod. B

TM

JSDIA3180ZZ

E
• When tightening manual lever mounting nut, set manual lever
in “N” position and fix manual lever to prevent it from moving.
F
: D position
: N position
: R position G
: P position
: Vehicle front
H
JSDIA4258ZZ

Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000011281218

I
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check A/T position after adjustment A/T position. Refer to TM-103, "Inspection and Adjustment".
J
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Adjust A/T position. Refer to TM-103, "Inspection and Adjustment".
K

Revision: 2015 January TM-213 2015 Q50

 PADDLE SHIFTER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
PADDLE SHIFTER
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011281219

JPDIA0051GB

Steering column assembly Paddle shifter (down) Paddle shifter (up)

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011281220

REMOVAL
1. Remove steering wheel. Refer to ST-31, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove steering column cover. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".
3. Disconnect paddle shifter connectors.
4. Remove paddle shifter mounting bolts and nuts.
5. Remove each paddle shifter from steering column assembly.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2015 January TM-214 2015 Q50

 CONTROL VALVE & TCM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
CONTROL VALVE & TCM
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011281221

TM

JPDIA1103GB

N
Transmission assembly Snap ring Control valve & TCM
Oil pan gasket Oil pan Clip
Oil pan mounting bolt Overflow plug Drain plug O
Drain plug gasket Magnet Clip
Joint connector
P
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: Apply ATF

Revision: 2015 January TM-215 2015 Q50

 CONTROL VALVE & TCM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011281222

REMOVAL
1. Remove rear engine cover. Refer to EXT-36, "FLOOR UNDER COVER : Removal and Installation".
2. Drain ATF through drain plug.
3. Remove exhaust mounting bracket with power tool. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".
4. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 connectors .

: Vehicle front
: Bolt

5. Remove heated oxygen sensor 2 harness from clips .

6. Remove bracket from transmission assembly. Refer to TM-
239, "2WD : Exploded View" (2WD), TM-242, "AWD : Exploded
View" (AWD).
SCIA8269E

7. Remove clips .

: Vehicle front
: Oil pan mounting bolt

8. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket.

JSDIA0793ZZ

9. Remove magnets from oil pan.

JPDIA0009ZZ

10. Remove snap ring from joint connector .

JSDIA1756ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-216 2015 Q50

 CONTROL VALVE & TCM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
11. Push joint connector .
A

JSDIA1757ZZ

TM
12. Disconnect output speed sensor connector .
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector. E
13. Disengage terminal clip ( ).

G
JPDIA1104ZZ

14. Remove bolts and clip from the control valve & TCM. H

: Vehicle front

I
Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts
43 (1.69) 3
J
40 (1.57) 2

54 (2.13) 6
JPDIA1105ZZ
50 (1.97) 2 K

* 50 (1.97) 1
*: Reamer bolt L
15. Remove the control valve & TCM from transmission case.
CAUTION:
When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch M
and manual plate height. Remove it vertically.

O
JPDIA0012ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-217 2015 Q50

 CONTROL VALVE & TCM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
16. Remove joint connector from the control valve & TCM using a
flat-bladed screwdriver .
17. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.

JPDIA0017ZZ

INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage connector when installing any connector.
• Never reuse joint connector.
• Apply ATF to O-ring of joint connector.
• Never reuse drain plug and drain plug gasket. In addition, install new drain plug and drain plug gas-
ket after adjustment of A/T fluid filling.
• Refer to the following when installing the control valve & TCM to transmission case.
CAUTION:
• Make sure that input speed sensor securely installs input
speed sensor holes .
• Hang down output speed sensor harness toward outside so
as not to disturb installation of the control valve & TCM.
• Adjust joint connector of the control valve & TCM to termi-
nal hole of transmission case.

JPDIA1106ZZ

• Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with

manual plate projection.

JPDIA0012ZZ

- Install bolts and clip to the control valve & TCM. Tighten bolt
to the specified torque before tightening the other than bolts.

: Vehicle front

Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts

43 (1.69) 3

40 (1.57) 2

54 (2.13) 6 JPDIA1105ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-218 2015 Q50

 CONTROL VALVE & TCM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts
A
50 (1.97) 2

* 50 (1.97) 1
*: Reamer bolt B
• Refer to the following when installing oil pan to transmission case.
CAUTION:
• Clean foreign materials (gear wear particles) that adhere on the inside of the oil pan and on the C
magnet, and then assembly.
• Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from oil pan gasket mounting surface of
transmission case and oil pan.
• Never reuse oil pan gasket and oil pan mounting bolts. TM
• Install oil pan gasket in the direction to align hole position.
- Tighten the oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque in the
numerical order as shown in the figure after temporarily tightening E
them.

: Vehicle front
F
• Fill with ATF after installation. Refer to TM-202, "Changing".

JSDIA0794ZZ

H
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000011281223

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

I
Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of mal-
function. If the ATF is very dark, smells burned, or contains foreign
particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may need replace-
ment. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish build up. J
Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick and can
inhibit pump pressure.
• If frictional material is detected, perform A/T fluid cooler K
cleaning. Refer to TM-99, "Cleaning".

L
SCIA5199E

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

Start the engine and check visually that there is no leakage of ATF. M

Revision: 2015 January TM-219 2015 Q50

 PARKING COMPONENTS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
PARKING COMPONENTS
2WD
2WD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000011281224

JSDIA1955GB

Parking actuator support Parking pawl Return spring

Pawl shaft Parking gear Seal ring
Output shaft Bearing race Needle bearing
Self-sealing bolt Rear extension
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Apply petroleum jelly

*: Apply Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent. Refer to GI-22, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".

2WD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011281225

REMOVAL
1. Remove rear engine cover. Refer to EXT-36, "FLOOR UNDER COVER : Removal and Installation".
2. Drain ATF through drain plug.
3. Remove exhaust front tube and center muffler with power tool. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".
4. Separate propeller shaft assembly. Refer to DLN-98, "Removal and Installation".
5. Remove control rod. Refer to TM-212, "Removal and Installation".
6. Support transmission assembly with a transmission jack.
CAUTION:

Revision: 2015 January TM-220 2015 Q50

 PARKING COMPONENTS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
When setting transmission jack, be careful not to allow it to collide against the drain plug.
7. Remove rear engine mounting member with power tool. Refer to EM-78, "2WD : Exploded View". A
8. Remove engine mounting insulator (rear). Refer to EM-78, "2WD : Exploded View".
9. Remove tightening bolts for rear extension assembly and trans-
mission case. B

: Bolt
C
: Self-sealing bolt

TM

JPDIA1138ZZ
E
10. Tap rear extension assembly with a soft hammer (A).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage adapter case. F

H
JPDIA0027ZZ

11. Remove rear extension assembly (with needle bearing) from I

transmission case.

SCIA3431E L

12. Remove bearing race from output shaft .

M

JPDIA0057ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-221 2015 Q50

 PARKING COMPONENTS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
13. Remove output shaft from transmission case by rotating left/
right.

JPDIA0028ZZ

14. Remove parking gear from output shaft .

JPDIA0029ZZ

15. Remove seal rings from output shaft.

JPDIA0030ZZ

16. Remove needle bearing from rear extension.

SCIA6179J

17. Remove parking actuator support from rear extension.

JPDIA0031ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-222 2015 Q50

 PARKING COMPONENTS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

18. Remove parking pawl (with return spring) and pawl shaft
from rear extension. A

JPDIA0032ZZ
TM
19. Remove return spring from parking pawl .

G
SCIA6180J

INSTALLATION H
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse seal rings and drain plug gasket. I
• Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing and seal rings.
• Insert the tip of parking rod between the parking pawl and the parking actuator support when assem-
bling the rear extension assembly.
• Refer to the followings installing rear extension assembly. J
- Apply recommended sealant to rear extension assembly as shown
in the figure.
K
* : Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent. Refer to GI-
22, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".

L
Sealant starting
: Start and finish point shall be in
point and end-
the center of two bolts.
point M
Overlap width of
sealant starting
: 3 – 5 mm (0.12 – 0.20 in)
point and end- N
point (B)
Sealant width (C) : 1.0 – 2.0 mm (0.04 – 0.08 in)
Sealant height (C) : 0.4 – 1.0 mm (0.016 – 0.04 in) O
CAUTION:
Completely remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc. from
transmission case and rear extension assembly mounting P
surfaces.

JSDIA1855ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-223 2015 Q50

 PARKING COMPONENTS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
- Tighten rear extension assembly bolts to the specified torque.

: Bolt
: Self-sealing bolt

• Fill with ATF after installation. Refer to TM-202, "Changing".

JPDIA1138ZZ

2WD : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000011281226

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

If the contact surface on parking actuator support , parking pawl
and etc. has excessive wear, abrasion, bend, or any other damage,
replace the components.

JPDIA0034ZZ

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

• Start the engine and check visually that there is no leakage of ATF.
• Check A/T position after adjusting A/T position. Refer to TM-103, "Inspection and Adjustment".
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Adjust A/T position. Refer to TM-103, "Inspection and Adjustment".

Revision: 2015 January TM-224 2015 Q50

 REAR OIL SEAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
REAR OIL SEAL
A
2WD
2WD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000011281227
B

TM

JSDIA1725ZZ G

Transmission assembly Rear oil seal

: Always replace after every disassembly. H
: Apply ATF

2WD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011281228 I

REMOVAL
1. Separate propeller shaft assembly. Refer to DLN-98, "Removal and Installation". J
2. Remove rear oil seal using a flat-bladed screwdriver (A).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch rear extension assembly. K

M
JPDIA0037ZZ

N
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• As shown in the figure, use the drift [SST: ST33400001 (J-26082)]
(A) to drive rear oil seal into rear extension assembly until it is O
flush.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse rear oil seal. P
• Apply ATF to rear oil seal.

JPDIA0039ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-225 2015 Q50

 REAR OIL SEAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
2WD : Inspection INFOID:0000000011281229

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

Drive the vehicle and check visually that there is no leakage of ATF.
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Adjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-204, "Adjustment".
AWD
AWD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000011281230

JSDIA1726ZZ

Transmission assembly Rear oil seal

: Always replace after every disassembly.
: Apply ATF

AWD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011281231

REMOVAL
1. Remove transfer assembly from transmission assembly. Refer to DLN-63, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove rear oil seal using a flat-bladed screwdriver (A).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch adapter case assembly.

JPDIA0038ZZ

INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2015 January TM-226 2015 Q50

 REAR OIL SEAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
• As shown in the figure, use the drift [64 mm (2.52 in) dia. commer-
cial service tool] (A) to drive rear oil seal into adapter case assem- A
bly until it is flush.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse rear oil seal.
B
• Apply ATF to rear oil seal.

JPDIA0040ZZ

TM
AWD : Inspection INFOID:0000000011281232

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION E

Drive the vehicle and check visually that there is no leakage of ATF.
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Adjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-204, "Adjustment". F

Revision: 2015 January TM-227 2015 Q50

 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
2WD
2WD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000011281233

JSDIA1953GB

Transmission assembly Oil pan gasket Oil pan

Overflow plug Drain plug Drain plug gasket
Oil pan mounting bolt Magnet Output speed sensor
Rear extension Self-sealing bolt
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Apply petroleum jelly

*: Apply Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent. Refer to GI-22, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".

2WD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011281234

REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
2. Remove rear engine cover. Refer to EXT-36, "FLOOR UNDER COVER : Removal and Installation".
3. Drain ATF through drain plug.
4. Remove exhaust front tube and center muffler with power tool. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".
5. Separate propeller shaft assembly. Refer to DLN-98, "Removal and Installation".
6. Remove control rod. Refer to TM-212, "Removal and Installation".
7. Remove exhaust mounting bracket. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2015 January TM-228 2015 Q50

 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
8. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 connectors .
A
: Vehicle front
: Bolt
B
9. Remove heated oxygen sensor 2 harness from clips .
10. Remove bracket from transmission assembly. Refer to TM-
239, "2WD : Exploded View". C

SCIA8269E

TM
11. Remove clips .

: Vehicle front E
: Oil pan mounting bolt

12. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. F

13. Support transmission assembly with a transmission jack.
CAUTION:
When setting transmission jack, place wooden blocks to
prevent from damaging control valve & TCM and transmis- G
JSDIA0793ZZ
sion case.
14. Remove rear engine mounting member with power tool. Refer to EM-78, "2WD : Exploded View".
H
15. Remove engine mounting insulator (rear). Refer to EM-78, "2WD : Exploded View".
16. Remove tightening bolts for rear extension assembly and trans-
mission case.
I
: Bolt
: Self-sealing bolt
J

JPDIA1138ZZ

L
17. Tap rear extension assembly with a soft hammer (A).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage adapter case.
M

O
JPDIA0027ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-229 2015 Q50

 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
18. Remove rear extension assembly (with needle bearing) from
transmission case.

SCIA3431E

19. Disconnect output speed sensor connector .

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector
20. Disengage terminal clips ( ).

JPDIA1104ZZ

21. Remove output speed sensor from transmission case.

: Bolt

CAUTION:
• Never subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it.
• Never disassemble.
• Never allow metal filings, etc. to get on the sensor's front
edge magnetic area.
• Never place in an area affected by magnetism.
JSDIA1885ZZ

INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order removal.
CAUTION:
• Insert the tip of parking rod between the parking pole and the parking actuator support when assem-
bling the rear extension assembly.
• Never reuse drain plug gasket.
• Refer to the followings when installing output speed sensor.
CAUTION:
• Never subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it.
• Never disassemble.
• Never allow metal filings, etc. to get on the sensor's front edge magnetic area.
• Never place in an area affected by magnetism.
• Refer to the followings when installing rear extension assembly.

Revision: 2015 January TM-230 2015 Q50

 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
- Apply recommended sealant to rear extension assembly as shown
in the figure. A

* : Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent. Refer to GI-

22, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
B

Sealant starting
: Start and finish point shall be in
point and end-
the center of two bolts. C
point
Overlap width of
sealant starting TM
: 3 – 5 mm (0.12 – 0.20 in)
point and end-
point (B)
Sealant width (C) : 1.0 – 2.0 mm (0.04 – 0.08 in) E
Sealant height (C) : 0.4 – 1.0 mm (0.016 – 0.04 in)
CAUTION:
Completely remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc. from F
transmission case and rear extension assembly mounting
surfaces.
G
JSDIA1855ZZ

- Tighten rear extension assembly bolts to the specified torque. H

: Bolt
: Self-sealing bolt I

JPDIA1138ZZ
K

• Refer to the followings when installing oil pan (with oil pan gas-
ket) and clips to transmission case. L

: Vehicle front
: Oil pan mounting bolt M
CAUTION:
• Never reuse oil pan gasket and oil pan mounting bolts.
• Install oil pan gasket in the direction to align hole position. N
• Install it so that drain plug comes to the position as shown
in the figure. JSDIA0793ZZ
• Be careful not to pinch harnesses.
• Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from oil pan mounting surface. O

Revision: 2015 January TM-231 2015 Q50

 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
- Tighten oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque in numerical
order shown in the figure after temporarily tightening them. Tighten
necessary oil pan mounting bolts with specified torque.

: Vehicle front

• Fill with ATF after installation. Refer to TM-202, "Changing".

JSDIA0794ZZ

2WD : Inspection INFOID:0000000011281235

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of mal-
function. If the ATF is very dark, smells burned, or contains foreign
particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may need replace-
ment. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish build up.
Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick and can
inhibit pump pressure.
• If frictional material is detected, perform A/T fluid cooler
cleaning. Refer to TM-99, "Cleaning".

SCIA5199E

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

• Start the engine and check visually that there is no leakage of ATF.
• Check A/T position after adjusting A/T position. Refer to TM-103, "Inspection and Adjustment".
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
• Adjust A/T position. Refer to TM-103, "Inspection and Adjustment".
• Adjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-204, "Adjustment".

Revision: 2015 January TM-232 2015 Q50

 AIR BREATHER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
AIR BREATHER
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011281236

TM

G
JSDIA1112ZZ

Bracket Transmission assembly Air breather tube

H
Clip Air breather hose Air breather box
Tightening must be done following the installation procedure. Refer to TM-239, "2WD : Removal and Installation" (2WD), TM-
243, "AWD : Removal and Installation" (AWD).
I
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011281237

REMOVAL J
1. Remove exhaust mounting bracket and three way catalyst (bank 1). Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".
2. Remove propeller shaft assembly (front). Refer to DLN-89, "Removal and Installation". (AWD models)
K
3. Remove clips from brackets.

: Vehicle front
L

N
JSDIA4261ZZ

4. Remove air breather box from bracket with suitable tool.

O
: Pawl

JSDIA4262ZZ

5. Remove air breather hose from air breather tube .

Revision: 2015 January TM-233 2015 Q50

 AIR BREATHER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

: Vehicle front

JSDIA4263ZZ

INSTALLATION
Note the followings and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Never bend the air breather hose to prevent damage to the hose.
• Insert air breather hose to air breather tube all the way to the
curve of the tube.

JSDIA4265ZZ

• Install air breather hose to air breather box so that the paint
mark is facing backward.

JSDIA4266ZZ

• Securely install the clips to the brackets.

: Vehicle front

JSDIA4261ZZ

Inspection INFOID:0000000011281238

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

Check for damage of breather hose and breather box.

Revision: 2015 January TM-234 2015 Q50

 FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011281239

2WD Models (Vehicle Speed Sensitive P/S) B

TM

I
JSDIA4243GB

Transmission assembly Copper washer Bracket J

Clip Fluid cooler tube Fluid cooler tube
Hose clamp A/T fluid cooler hose B A/T fluid cooler hose A
K
To radiator
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) L

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

Revision: 2015 January TM-235 2015 Q50

 FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
2WD Models (Direct Adaptive Steering)

JSDIA4242GB

Transmission assembly Copper washer Bracket

Clip Fluid cooler tube Fluid cooler tube
Hose clamp Fluid cooler hose B Fluid cooler hose A
To radiator
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

Revision: 2015 January TM-236 2015 Q50

 FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
AWD Models
A

TM

H
JSDIA4244GB

Transmission assembly Copper washer Bracket

Clip Fluid cooler tube Fluid cooler tube I
Bracket Hose clamp Fluid cooler hose B
Fluid cooler hose A J
To radiator
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
K

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

L
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011281240

REMOVAL M
CAUTION:
Be careful not to bend A/T fluid cooler tubes.
NOTE: N
When removing the fluid cooler tube or the fluid cooler hose, cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spill-
ing.
INSTALLATION O
Note the followings and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Never reuse copper washers.
• Refer to the following when installing fluid cooler hoses. P

Revision: 2015 January TM-237 2015 Q50

 FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

Installation side Direction of Hose insertion depth

Fluid cooler hose paint mark (L)
tube

: Hose end reaches

Fluid cooler tube
the 2 stage bulge
Fluid cooler hose A
: Insert the hose
Radiator assembly until the hose touches
the radiator
Downward
: Hose end reaches
Fluid cooler tube
the 2 stage bulge
Fluid cooler hose B
: Insert the hose
Radiator assembly until the hose touches
the radiator

JSDIA1640ZZ

• Refer to the following when installing hose clamps.

CAUTION:
Hose clamp should not interfere with the bulge of tube.

Hose clamp
Installation side
Fluid cooler hose Clamping position
tube Direction of tab
(A)
Fluid cooler tube
Fluid cooler hose A
Radiator assembly 5 – 9 mm (0.20 –
Downward 0.35 in) from hose
Fluid cooler tube end
Fluid cooler hose B
Radiator assembly

JSDIA2424ZZ

Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000011281241

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

Check for damage of fluid cooler hoses and fluid cooler tubes.
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Adjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-204, "Adjustment".
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Start the engine and check visually that there is no leakage of ATF.

Revision: 2015 January TM-238 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]

UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A

TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
2WD
B
2WD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000011281242

TM

J
JPDIA1065GB

Transmission assembly Bracket Bracket K

Bracket Bracket
Tightening must be done following the installation procedure. Refer to TM-239, "2WD : Removal and Installation".
L
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

M
2WD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011281243

REMOVAL N
CAUTION:
• When removing the transmission assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor
(POS) from the transmission assembly. O
• Be careful not to damage sensor edge.
1. Shift the selector lever to “P” position and release the parking brake.
2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. P
3. Remove front under cover and front under cover rear with a power tool. Refer to EXT-33, "FRONT
UNDER COVER : Exploded View".
4. Remove rear engine cover with a power tool. Refer to EXT-35, "FLOOR UNDER COVER : Exploded
View".
5. Remove control rod from lower lever of A/T shift selector assembly. Refer to TM-211, "Exploded View".
6. Separate propeller shaft assembly. Refer to DLN-98, "Removal and Installation".
NOTE:

Revision: 2015 January TM-239 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Cap or plug opening to prevent fluid from spilling.
7. Remove suspension member stay. Refer to FSU-22, "Exploded View".
8. Remove exhaust mounting bracket with power tool. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".
9. Remove three way catalyst (bank 1). Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".
10. Remove crankshaft position sensor form cylinder block. Refer to EM-73, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
• Never subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it.
• Never disassemble.
• Never allow metal filings, etc. to get on the sensor's front edge magnetic area.
• Never place in an area affected by magnetism.
11. Remove starter motor from transmission housing. Refer to STR-19, "VQ37VHR : Removal and Installation
(Vehicle speed sensitive P/S models)", STR-21, "VQ37VHR : Removal and Installation (Direct adaptive
steering models)".
12. Disconnect steering angle main motor harness connector and
remove steering angle main motor harness connector from
bracket. (Direct adaptive steering models)

: Vehicle front

13. Remove rear plate cover. Refer to EM-47, "2WD : Exploded

View".

JSDIA4269ZZ

14. Turn crankshaft, and remove the four tightening bolts ( ) for
drive plate and torque converter.
CAUTION:
Rotate crankshaft clockwise (as viewed from the crankshaft
pulley side).
15. Remove fluid cooler tubes mounting bolts from transmission
assembly and engine. Refer to TM-235, "Exploded View".
NOTE:
Cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spilling.
16. Support transmission assembly with a transmission jack.
CAUTION: JPDIA0044ZZ

Be careful not to allow it to collide against the drain plug

and overflow plug when setting the transmission jack.
17. Remove rear engine mounting member and engine mounting insulator (rear) with a power tool. Refer to
EM-78, "2WD : Exploded View".
18. Disconnect A/T assembly connector.
19. Remove harness brackets from transmission assembly.
20. Remove bolts fixing transmission assembly to engine with a
power tool.

: Transmission to engine
: Engine to transmission

JSDIA4270ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-240 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
21. Remove transmission assembly from the vehicle.
CAUTION: A
• Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping.
• Secure transmission assembly to a transmission jack.
• Never damage heated oxygen sensor 2.
B
NOTE:
By placing wooden block between oil pan (upper) and front sus-
pension member, the removal of transmission assembly from
engine becomes easier. C
22. Remove manual lever and control rod from transmission assem-
bly. Refer to TM-211, "Exploded View". SCIA0499E

23. Remove air breather hose, air breather box and bracket from TM
transmission assembly. Refer to TM-233, "Exploded View".
INSTALLATION
Note the followings and Install in the reverse order of removal. E
• Check fitting of dowel pin ( ).

H
JPDIA0900ZZ

• Install the fixing bolts of A/T assembly and engine according to the following standards. I

Bolt symbol
J
Insertion direction Transmission to engine Engine to transmission
Number of bolts 8 4
Bolt length (L) K
65 (2.56) 35 (1.38)
mm (in)
Tightening torque
75 (7.7, 55) 46.6 (4.8, 34)
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) L
*: Tightening the bolt with bracket. Refer to TM-233, "Exploded JPDIA0979ZZ
View".
M
• Align the positions of tightening bolts for drive plate with those of
the torque converter, and temporarily tighten the bolts ( ). Then,
tighten the bolts with the specified torque. N
CAUTION:
• Rotate crankshaft clockwise (as viewed from the crankshaft
pulley side).
• When tightening the tightening bolts for the torque con- O
verter after fixing the crankshaft pulley bolts, be sure to con-
firm the tightening torque of the crankshaft pulley mounting
bolts. Refer to EM-56, "Removal and Installation". P
• Rotate crankshaft several turns and check to be sure that
JPDIA0044ZZ
transmission rotates freely without binding after converter
is installed to drive plate.
2WD : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000011281244

INSPECTION BEFORE INSTALLATION

Revision: 2015 January TM-241 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Be sure to check dimension (A) to ensure it is within the reference
value limit.

B : Scale
C : Straightedge

Dimension (A) : Refer to TM-333, "Torque Convert-

er".

JPDIA0042ZZ

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

• Start the engine and check visually that there is no leakage of ATF.
• Check A/T position after adjusting A/T position. Refer to TM-103, "Inspection and Adjustment".
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
• Adjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-204, "Adjustment".
• Adjust A/T position. Refer to TM-103, "Inspection and Adjustment".
AWD
AWD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000011281245

JPDIA1071GB

Transmission assembly Bracket Bracket

Bracket Bracket
Tightening must be done following the installation procedure. Refer to TM-243, "AWD : Removal and Installation".
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

Revision: 2015 January TM-242 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
AWD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011281246

A
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• When removing the transmission assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor B
(POS) from the transmission assembly.
• Be careful not to damage sensor edge.
1. Shift the selector lever to “P” position, and release the parking brake. C
2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
3. Remove front under cover with a power tool. Refer to EXT-33, "FRONT UNDER COVER : Exploded
View". TM
4. Remove rear engine cover with a power tool. Refer to EXT-35, "FLOOR UNDER COVER : Exploded
View".
5. Remove control rod from lower lever of A/T shift selector assembly. Refer to TM-211, "Exploded View". E
6. Separate propeller shaft assembly (rear). Refer to DLN-108, "Removal and Installation".
7. Separate propeller shaft assembly (front). Refer to DLN-89, "Removal and Installation".
8. Remove crankshaft position sensor form cylinder block. Refer to EM-73, "Exploded View". F
CAUTION:
• Never subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it.
• Never disassemble. G
• Never allow metal filings, etc. to get on the sensor's front edge magnetic area.
• Never place in an area affected by magnetism.
9. Remove starter motor from transmission housing. Refer to STR-19, "VQ37VHR : Removal and Installation H
(Vehicle speed sensitive P/S models)", STR-21, "VQ37VHR : Removal and Installation (Direct adaptive
steering models)".
10. Disconnect steering angle main motor harness connector and steering angle sub motor harness connec-
I
tor, and remove harness clip from bracket. Refer to ST-102, "Harness Layout". (Direct adaptive steering
models)
11. Remove rear plate cover. Refer to EM-49, "AWD : Exploded View".
J
12. Turn crankshaft, and remove the four tightening bolts ( ) for
drive plate and torque converter.
CAUTION:
Rotate crankshaft clockwise (as viewed from the crankshaft K
pulley side).
13. Remove fluid cooler tubes mounting bolts from transmission
assembly and engine. Refer to TM-235, "Exploded View". L
NOTE:
Cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spilling.
14. Support transmission assembly with a transmission jack. M
CAUTION: JPDIA0044ZZ

When setting the transmission jack, be careful not to allow

it to collide against the drain plug and overflow plug.
N
15. Remove rear engine mounting member and engine mounting insulator (rear) with a power tool. Refer to
EM-83, "AWD : Exploded View".
16. Disconnect A/T assembly connector and AWD solenoid connector.
O
17. Remove harness brackets from transmission assembly and transfer assembly.

Revision: 2015 January TM-243 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
18. Remove bolts fixing transmission assembly to engine with a
power tool.

: Transmission to engine
: Engine to transmission

JSDIA4270ZZ

19. Remove transmission assembly with transfer assembly from the

vehicle.
CAUTION:
• Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping.
• Secure transmission assembly to a transmission jack.
• Never damage heated oxygen sensor 2.
NOTE:
By placing wooden block between oil pan (upper) and front sus-
pension member, the removal of transmission assembly from
engine becomes easier.
20. Remove manual lever and control rod from transmission assem- SCIA2203E
bly. Refer to TM-211, "Exploded View".
21. Remove air breather hoses, air breather box, and bracket. Refer to TM-233, "Exploded View" (Transmis-
sion), DLN-61, "Exploded View" (Transfer).
22. Remove transfer assembly from transmission assembly with a power tool. Refer to DLN-63, "Removal
and Installation".
NOTE:
Cap or plug opening to prevent fluid from spilling.
INSTALLATION
Note the followings and install in the reverse order of removal.
• Check fitting of dowel pin ( ).

JPDIA0900ZZ

• Install the fixing bolts of transmission and engine according to the following standards.

Bolt symbol
Insertion direction Transmission to engine Engine to transmission
Number of bolts 8 4
Bolt length (L)
65 (2.56) 35 (1.38)
mm (in)
Tightening torque
75 (7.7, 55) 46.6 (4.8, 34)
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
*: Tightening the bolt with bracket of air breather tube. Refer to TM- JPDIA0979ZZ
233, "Exploded View".

Revision: 2015 January TM-244 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A]
• Align the positions of tightening bolts for drive plate with those of
the torque converter, and temporarily tighten the bolts ( ). Then, A
tighten the bolts with the specified torque.
CAUTION:
• Rotate crankshaft clockwise (as viewed from the crankshaft
B
pulley side).
• When tightening the tightening bolts for the torque con-
verter after fixing the crankshaft pulley bolts, be sure to con-
firm the tightening torque of the crankshaft pulley mounting C
bolts. Refer to EM-56, "Removal and Installation".
• Rotate crankshaft several turns and check to be sure that
JPDIA0044ZZ
transmission rotates freely without binding after converter TM
is installed to drive plate.
AWD : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000011281247

E
INSPECTION BEFORE INSTALLATION
Be sure to check dimension (A) to ensure it is within the reference
value limit. F
B : Scale
C : Straightedge
G

Dimension (A) : Refer to TM-333, "Torque Convert-

er". H

JPDIA0042ZZ

I
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Start the engine and check visually that there is no leakage of ATF.
• Check A/T position after adjusting A/T position. Refer to TM-103, "Inspection and Adjustment".
J
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
• Adjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-204, "Adjustment".
• Adjust A/T position. Refer to TM-103, "Inspection and Adjustment".
K

Revision: 2015 January TM-245 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]

UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011281248

2WD MODELS

JPDIA1140GB

Revision: 2015 January TM-246 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]

Torque converter Converter housing Oil pump housing oil seal A

Oil pump housing O-ring Oil pump cover
O-ring D-ring D-ring
Front brake piston Front brake spring retainer Snap ring
B

D-ring D-ring 2346 brake piston

2346 brake spring retainer Snap ring Seal ring C
2346 brake dish plate 2346 brake driven plate 2346 brake drive plate
2346 brake retaining plate Snap ring Bearing race
Needle bearing Under drive sun gear Needle bearing TM
Front brake retaining plate Front brake drive plate Front brake driven plate
Front brake retaining plate Snap ring 1st one-way clutch E
Snap ring Under drive carrier assembly Front brake hub assembly
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) F

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: Select with proper thickness. G

: Apply ATF.

: Apply petroleum jelly. H

: Apply Genuine RTV silicone sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-22, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".

Revision: 2015 January TM-247 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]

JPDIA1188ZZ

Needle bearing Snap ring Front carrier assembly

Needle bearing O-ring Seal ring
Input clutch assembly Rear internal gear Needle bearing
Mid carrier assembly Needle bearing Bearing race
Rear carrier assembly Needle bearing Mid sun gear
Seal ring Rear sun gear 2nd one-way clutch
Snap ring Needle bearing High and low reverse clutch hub
Snap ring Bearing race Needle bearing
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: Apply ATF.

: Apply petroleum jelly.

Revision: 2015 January TM-248 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]

TM

JPDIA1190ZZ

P
Bearing race High and low reverse clutch assem- Needle bearing
bly
Direct clutch assembly Needle bearing Reverse brake dish plate
Reverse brake dish plate Reverse brake driven plate N-spring
Snap ring Reverse brake retaining plate Reverse brake drive plate
Snap ring Reverse brake spring retainer Reverse brake return spring

Revision: 2015 January TM-249 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Reverse brake piston D-ring D-ring
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: Select with proper thickness.
: Apply ATF.

: Apply petroleum jelly.

JSDIA1947GB

Revision: 2015 January TM-250 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]

Parking rod Manual plate Manual shaft A

Retaining pin Detent spring Oil seal
Bracket O-ring Self-sealing bolt
Baffle plate O-ring Seal ring
B

Snap ring Oil pan gasket Oil pan

Clip Oil pan mounting bolt Overflow plug C
Drain plug Drain plug gasket Magnet
Clip Control valve & TCM Joint connector
Transmission case Retaining pin Output speed sensor TM
Needle bearing Parking gear Seal ring
Output shaft Bearing race E
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
F
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: Select with proper thickness.

: Apply ATF. G

: Apply petroleum jelly.

M
JSDIA1894GB

Parking actuator support Parking pawl Pawl shaft N

Return spring Needle bearing Rear extension
Self-sealing bolt Rear oil seal
O
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Apply ATF. P
: Apply petroleum jelly.
: Apply Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent. Refer to GI-22, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
*

AWD MODELS

Revision: 2015 January TM-251 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]

JPDIA1140GB

Torque converter Converter housing Oil pump housing oil seal

Oil pump housing O-ring Oil pump cover
O-ring D-ring D-ring
Front brake piston Front brake spring retainer Snap ring
D-ring D-ring 2346 brake piston

Revision: 2015 January TM-252 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
2346 brake spring retainer Snap ring Seal ring
2346 brake dish plate 2346 brake driven plate 2346 brake drive plate
A

2346 brake retaining plate Snap ring Bearing race

Needle bearing Under drive sun gear Needle bearing B
Front brake retaining plate Front brake drive plate Front brake driven plate
Front brake retaining plate Snap ring 1st one-way clutch
Snap ring Under drive carrier assembly Front brake hub assembly C
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) TM
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: Select with proper thickness. E

: Apply ATF.

: Apply petroleum jelly.

F
: Apply Genuine RTV silicone sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-22, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".

Revision: 2015 January TM-253 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]

JPDIA1188ZZ

Needle bearing Snap ring Front carrier assembly

Needle bearing O-ring Seal ring
Input clutch assembly Rear internal gear Needle bearing
Mid carrier assembly Needle bearing Bearing race
Rear carrier assembly Needle bearing Mid sun gear
Seal ring Rear sun gear 2nd one-way clutch
Snap ring Needle bearing High and low reverse clutch hub
Snap ring Bearing race Needle bearing
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: Apply ATF.

: Apply petroleum jelly.

Revision: 2015 January TM-254 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]

TM

JPDIA1190ZZ

P
Bearing race High and low reverse clutch assem- Needle bearing
bly
Direct clutch assembly Needle bearing Reverse brake dish plate
Reverse brake dish plate Reverse brake driven plate N-spring
Snap ring Reverse brake retaining plate Reverse brake drive plate
Snap ring Reverse brake spring retainer Reverse brake return spring

Revision: 2015 January TM-255 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Reverse brake piston D-ring D-ring
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: Select with proper thickness.
: Apply ATF.

: Apply petroleum jelly.

JSDIA1965GB

Revision: 2015 January TM-256 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]

Parking rod Manual plate Manual shaft A

Retaining pin Detent spring Oil seal
Bracket O-ring Self-sealing bolt
Baffle plate O-ring Seal ring
B

Snap ring Oil pan gasket Oil pan

Clip Oil pan mounting bolt Overflow plug C
Drain plug Drain plug gasket Magnet
Clip Control valve & TCM Joint connector
Transmission case Retaining pin Output speed sensor TM
Gasket Needle bearing Parking gear
Seal ring Output shaft Bearing race E
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
F
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: Apply ATF.
G
: Apply petroleum jelly.

JSDIA1948GB M

Parking actuator support Parking pawl Pawl shaft

Return spring Needle bearing Self-sealing bolt N
Rear oil seal Adapter case Bracket
: Always replace after every disassembly.
O
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Apply ATF.

: Apply petroleum jelly. P

Revision: 2015 January TM-257 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Oil Channel INFOID:0000000011281249

JSDIA1716GB

Location of Needle Bearings and Bearing Races INFOID:0000000011281250

2WD MODELS

Revision: 2015 January TM-258 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]

TM

JPDIA1144ZZ
K

Location Item Outer diameter mm (in)

L
Needle bearing 94 (3.701)

Bearing race 58.6 (2.307)

Needle bearing 60 (2.362) M

Needle bearing 84.6 (3.331)

Needle bearing 77 (3.031) N

Needle bearing 47 (1.850)

Needle bearing 84 (3.307)

O
Bearing race 82 (3.228)

Needle bearing 80 (3.150)

P
Needle bearing 92 (3.622)

Bearing race 61.1 (2.406)

Needle bearing 60 (2.362)

Bearing race 61.9 (2.437)

Needle bearing 62.8 (2.472)

Revision: 2015 January TM-259 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Location Item Outer diameter mm (in)

Needle bearing 92 (3.622)

Needle bearing 65 (2.559)

Bearing race 58 (2.283)

Needle bearing 60 (2.362)

AWD MODELS

JPDIA1145ZZ

Location Item Outer diameter mm (in)

Needle bearing 94 (3.701)

Bearing race 58.6 (2.307)

Needle bearing 60 (2.362)

Needle bearing 84.6 (3.331)

Needle bearing 77 (3.031)

Needle bearing 47 (1.850)

Needle bearing 84 (3.307)

Bearing race 82 (3.228)

Revision: 2015 January TM-260 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Location Item Outer diameter mm (in)
A
Needle bearing 80 (3.150)

Needle bearing 92 (3.622)

Bearing race 61.1 (2.406) B

Needle bearing 60 (2.362)

Bearing race 61.9 (2.437) C

Needle bearing 62.8 (2.472)

Needle bearing 92 (3.622)

TM
Needle bearing 65 (2.559)

Bearing race 58 (2.283)

E
Needle bearing 60 (2.362)

Location of Snap Rings INFOID:0000000011281251

F
2WD MODELS

N
JPDIA1146ZZ

Location Shape of snap ring Outer diameter mm (in)

O
159.9 (6.295)

159 (6.260)

216 (8.504) P

180.4 (7.102)

171.5 (6.752)

169 (6.654)

180.5 (7.106)

Revision: 2015 January TM-261 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Location Shape of snap ring Outer diameter mm (in)
181.0 (7.126)

64.6 (2.543)

136 (5.354)

70.5 (2.776)

135 (5.315)

48.4 (1.906)

AWD MODELS

JPDIA1147ZZ

Location Shape of snap ring Outer diameter mm (in)

159.9 (6.295)

159 (6.260)

216 (8.504)

180.4 (7.102)

171.5 (6.752)

169 (6.654)

180.5 (7.106)

181.0 (7.126)

64.6 (2.543)

136 (5.354)

70.5 (2.776)

Revision: 2015 January TM-262 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Location Shape of snap ring Outer diameter mm (in)
A
135 (5.315)

48.4 (1.906)
B
Disassembly INFOID:0000000011281252

CAUTION:
Never disassemble parts behind drum support. Refer to TM-23, "TRANSMISSION : Cross-Sectional C
View".
1. Drain ATF through drain plug.
2. Remove torque converter by holding it firmly and turning while TM
pulling straight out.

G
SCIA5010E

3. Remove tightening bolts ( ) for converter housing and trans-

mission case. H
4. Remove converter housing from transmission case.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch converter housing. I

JSDIA1913ZZ

K
5. Remove O-ring from input clutch assembly.

N
SCIA5011E

6. Remove tightening bolts ( ) for oil pump assembly and trans- O

mission case.

JPDIA1108ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-263 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
7. Attach the sliding hammers [SST: ST25850000 (J-25721-A)] (A)
to oil pump assembly and extract it evenly from transmission
case.

: Sliding hammer attachment position

CAUTION:
• Fully tighten the sliding hammer screws.
• Make sure that bearing race is installed to the oil pump
assembly edge surface.

JPDIA1109ZZ

8. Remove O-ring from oil pump assembly.

JPDIA1110ZZ

9. Remove bearing race from oil pump assembly.

JPDIA1111ZZ

10. Remove seal ring from oil pump assembly.

JSDIA1721ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-264 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
11. Remove under drive sun gear from under drive carrier
assembly. A

JPDIA1112ZZ

TM
12. Remove needle bearing from under drive sun gear.

G
JPDIA1113ZZ

13. Remove needle bearing from under drive carrier assembly. H

JPDIA1114ZZ
K
14. Remove front brake component part (retaining plates, drive
plates and driven plate) from transmission case by using a wire
(A) with its tip bent like a hook. L

N
JPDIA1115ZZ

15. Remove snap ring from transmission case using a flat-bladed O

screwdriver.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch transmission case and 1st one- P
way clutch.
• Be careful not to damage snap ring.

JPDIA1116ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-265 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
16. Remove input clutch assembly (with 1st one-way clutch, under
drive carrier assembly, front brake hub, front carrier assembly,
and rear internal gear) from transmission case.

JPDIA1117ZZ

17. Remove 1st one-way clutch from front brake hub.

JPDIA1118ZZ

18. Remove under drive carrier assembly (with front brake hub)
from front carrier assembly.

JPDIA1119ZZ

19. Remove needle bearing from front carrier assembly.

JPDIA1120ZZ

20. Remove seal rings from input clutch assembly.

JPDIA1121ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-266 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
21. Remove mid carrier assembly and rear carrier assembly as a
unit. A

SCIA5017E
TM
22. Remove mid carrier assembly from rear carrier assembly.

G
SCIA5697E

23. Remove needle bearing (front side) from mid carrier assembly. H

SCIA2805E K

24. Remove needle bearing (rear side) from mid carrier assembly.
L

SCIA2804E

25. Remove bearing race from rear carrier assembly. O

SCIA5175E

Revision: 2015 January TM-267 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
26. Remove needle bearing from rear carrier assembly.

SCIA2803E

27. Remove mid sun gear assembly, rear sun gear assembly, and
high and low reverse clutch hub as a unit.
CAUTION:
Be careful to remove then with bearing race and needle
bearing.

SCIA5018E

28. Remove high and low reverse clutch assembly from direct clutch
assembly.
CAUTION:
Make sure that needle bearing is installed to the high and
low reverse clutch assembly edge surface.

SCIA2306E

29. Remove direct clutch assembly from reverse brake.

SCIA5019E

30. Remove needle bearing from drum support.

SCIA5198E

Revision: 2015 January TM-268 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]

31. Remove snap ring from joint connector .

A

JPDIA0007ZZ
TM
32. Push joint connector .
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector. E

G
JPDIA0008ZZ

33. Remove oil pan mounting bolts ( ). H

: Clip
: Front I

34. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket.

J

JSDIA0793ZZ K

35. Remove magnets from oil pan.

L

JPDIA0009ZZ

36. Disconnect output speed sensor connector . O

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.
37. Disengage terminal clips ( ). P

JPDIA1104ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-269 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]

38. Remove control valve & TCM mounting bolts and clip from
the control valve & TCM.

: Front

Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts

43 (1.69) 3

40 (1.57) 2

54 (2.13) 6 JPDIA1105ZZ

50 (1.97) 2

* 50 (1.97) 1

*: Reamer bolt
39. Remove the control valve & TCM from transmission case.
CAUTION:
When removing, never with the manual valve notch and
manual plate height. Remove it vertically.

JSDIA1823ZZ

40. Remove joint connector from the control valve & TCM using a
flat-bladed screwdriver .

JSDIA1718ZZ

41. Disconnect TCM connector .

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.

JSDIA1813ZZ

42. Remove rear extension assembly (2WD) or adapter case assembly (AWD) according to the following pro-
cedures.
a. 2WD

Revision: 2015 January TM-270 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
i. Remove tightening bolts for rear extension assembly and trans-
mission case. A

: Bolt
: Self-sealing bolt B

JPDIA1138ZZ

TM
ii. Tap rear extension assembly using a soft hammer.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage rear extension.
E

G
SCIA5028E

iii. Remove rear extension assembly from transmission case. (With

H
needle bearing.)

SCIA5029E
K
iv. Remove bearing race from output shaft.

N
SCIA5245E

v. Remove output shaft from transmission case by rotating left/ O

right.

SCIA5030E

Revision: 2015 January TM-271 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]

vi. Remove parking gear from output shaft .

JPDIA0029ZZ

vii. Remove seal rings from output shaft.

JPDIA0030ZZ

b. AWD
i. Remove tightening bolts for adapter case assembly and trans-
mission case.

: Bracket
: Bolt
: Self-sealing bolt

JPDIA1137ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-272 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
ii. Tap adapter case assembly using a soft hammer.
CAUTION: A
Be careful not to damage adapter case.

SCIA5201E

TM
iii. Remove adapter case assembly from transmission case. (With
needle bearing)
E

G
SCIA5186E

iv. Remove bearing race from output shaft.

H

SCIA5245E
K
v. Remove output shaft from transmission case by rotating left/
right.
L

N
SCIA5030E

vi. Remove gasket from transmission case. O

SCIA5231E

Revision: 2015 January TM-273 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]

vii. Remove parking gear from output shaft .

JPDIA0029ZZ

viii. Remove seal rings from output shaft.

JPDIA0030ZZ

43. Remove needle bearing from transmission case.

SCIA5031E

44. Remove output speed sensor from transmission case.

: Bolt

CAUTION:
• Never subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it.
• Never disassemble.
• Never allow metal filings, etc. to get on the sensor's front
edge magnetic area.
• Never place in an area affected by magnetism.
JSDIA1321ZZ

45. Remove reverse brake snap ring (fixing plate) with 2 flat-bladed
screwdrivers.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch transmission case and reverse
brake retaining plate.
• Be careful not to damage snap ring.
NOTE:
Press out snap ring from the transmission case oil pan side gap
with a flat-bladed screwdriver, and remove it using a another
screwdriver.
46. Remove reverse brake retaining plate from transmission case. SCIA5032E

Revision: 2015 January TM-274 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
47. Remove N-spring from transmission case.
A

SCIA5214E
TM
48. Remove reverse brake component part (drive plates, driven
plates, and dish plates) from transmission case.
E

G
SCIA2322E

49. Remove snap ring (fixing spring retainer) using a flat-bladed H

screwdriver.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch transmission case and spring
retainer. I
• Be careful not to damage snap ring.

SCIA2323E K

50. Remove reverse brake spring retainer and reverse brake return
spring from transmission case.
L

SCIA2324E

51. Remove seal rings from drum support. O

SCIA3333E

Revision: 2015 January TM-275 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
52. Remove needle bearing from drum support edge surface.

SCIA2796E

53. Remove reverse brake piston from transmission case with

compressed air. Refer to TM-258, "Oil Channel".

: Reverse brake pressure hole

CAUTION:
Care should be taken not to abruptly blow air. It makes pis-
tons incline, as the result, it becomes hard to disassemble
the pistons.

JSDIA1819ZZ

54. Remove D-rings from reverse brake piston.

SCIA6330E

55. Remove manual shaft retaining pin with pair of nippers.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to cut retaining pin.

SCIA2329E

Revision: 2015 January TM-276 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]

56. Remove manual plate from detent spring .

A
57. Remove parking rod from manual plate.
58. Install manual plate to detent spring.
B

JPDIA1131ZZ
TM
59. Use a pin punch [4 mm (0.16 in) dia. commercial service tool] to
knock out retaining pin .
E

G
JPDIA1132ZZ

60. Remove manual plate from manual shaft. H

SCIA5715E K

61. Remove manual shaft from transmission case.

L

SCIA5716E

62. Remove manual shaft oil seals using a flat-bladed screwdriver. O

CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch transmission case.
P

SCIA2331E

Revision: 2015 January TM-277 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]

63. Remove detent spring from transmission case.

: Bolt

JPDIA1134ZZ

64. Remove needle bearing from rear extension (2WD) or

adapter case (AWD).

SCIA6179J

65. Remove parking actuator support from rear extension (2WD) or

adapter case (AWD).

SCIA3423E

66. Remove parking pawl (with return spring) and pawl shaft from
rear extension (2WD) or adapter case (AWD).

SCIA3424E

67. Remove return spring from parking pawl .

SCIA6180J

Revision: 2015 January TM-278 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]

68. Remove rear oil seal from rear extension or adapter case
using a flat-bladed screwdriver (A). A

: 2WD
: AWD B

CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch rear extension or adapter case.
C

TM

G
JSDIA0157ZZ

Assembly INFOID:0000000011281253 H

1. As shown in the figure, use a drift [22 mm (0.87 in) dia. commer-
cial service tool] to drive manual shaft oil seals into the transmis- I
sion case until it is flush.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse manual shaft oil seals.
• Apply ATF to manual shaft oil seals. J

SCIA5259E

L
2. Install detent spring to transmission case. Tighten detent spring
bolt to the specified torque.

: Bolt
M

O
JPDIA1134ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-279 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
3. Install manual shaft to transmission case.

SCIA5716E

4. Install parking rod to manual plate .

JSDIA1820ZZ

5. Install manual plate (with parking rod) to manual shaft.

SCIA5715E

6. Install retaining pin into the manual plate and manual shaft.
a. Fit pinhole of the manual plate to pinhole of the manual shaft
with a pin punch.
b. Use a hammer to tap the retaining pin into the manual plate.

(A) : Approx. 2 mm (0.08in)

CAUTION:
Drive retaining pin to 2±0.5 mm (0.08±0.020 in) over the
manual plate.
JPDIA1133ZZ

7. Install retaining pin into the transmission case and manual shaft.
a. Fit pinhole of the transmission case to pinhole of the manual
shaft with a pin punch.
b. Use a hammer to tap the retaining pin into the transmission
case.
CAUTION:
Drive retaining pin to 5±1 mm (0.20±0.04 in) over the trans-
mission case.

SCIA2427E

Revision: 2015 January TM-280 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
8. Install D-rings to reverse brake piston.
A

SCIA6330E
TM
9. Install reverse brake piston to transmission case.

G
SCIA2325E

10. Install needle bearing to drum support edge surface. H

CAUTION:
Check the direction of needle bearing. Refer to TM-258,
"Location of Needle Bearings and Bearing Races".
I

SCIA2796E K

11. Install seal rings to drum support.

L

SCIA3333E

12. Install reverse brake spring retainer and reverse brake return O
spring to transmission case.

SCIA2324E

Revision: 2015 January TM-281 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
13. Set the clutch spring compressor [SST: KV31102400 (J-34285
and J-34285-87)] (A) on reverse brake spring retainer and install
snap ring (fixing spring retainer) to transmission case while
compressing return spring.
CAUTION:
• Securely assemble them using a flat-bladed screwdriver
so that snap ring tension is slightly weak.
• Be careful not to damage snap ring.

JPDIA1186ZZ

14. Install reverse brake component part (drive plates, driven plates,
and dish plates) to transmission case.

: Snap ring
: Retaining plate
: Drive plate (six pieces)
: Driven plate (six pieces)
: Dish plate
: Dish plate
JPDIA1135ZZ

CAUTION:
Check order of plates.

Revision: 2015 January TM-282 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
15. Assemble N-spring.
16. Install reverse brake retaining plate to transmission case. A

TM

G
SCIA5249E

17. Install snap ring to transmission case.

CAUTION: H
Be careful not to damage snap ring.

SCIA2439E
K
18. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If not
within specified clearance, select proper retaining plate.
L
Specified clearance (A)
Standard: Refer to TM-334, "Reverse Brake Clear-
ance". M
Retaining plate: Refer to TM-334, "Reverse Brake Clear-
ance"
N
SCIA3129E

19. Install needle bearing to transmission case.

O
CAUTION:
Check the direction of needle bearing. Refer to TM-258,
"Location of Needle Bearings and Bearing Races".
P

SCIA5031E

Revision: 2015 January TM-283 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
20. Install output speed sensor to transmission case. Tighten out-
put speed sensor bolt to the specified torque.

: Bolt

CAUTION:
• Never subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it.
• Never disassemble.
• Never allow metal filings, etc. to get on the sensor's front
edge magnetic area.
• Never place in an area affected by magnetism.
JSDIA1321ZZ

21. As shown in the figure, use the drift to drive rear oil seal into the
rear extension (2WD) or adapter case (AWD) until it is
flush.

(1) : Drift [SST: 33400001 (J-26082)]

(2) : Drift [Commercial service tool Ø64 mm (2.52 in)]
CAUTION:
• Never reuse rear oil seal.
• Apply ATF to rear oil seal.

JSDIA1914ZZ

22. Install return spring to parking pawl .

SCIA6180J

23. Install parking pawl (with return spring) and pawl shaft to rear
extension (2WD) or adapter case (AWD).

SCIA3424E

Revision: 2015 January TM-284 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
24. Install parking actuator support to rear extension (2WD) or
adapter case (AWD). A

SCIA3423E

TM
25. Install needle bearing to rear extension (2WD) or adapter
case (AWD).
CAUTION: E
Check the direction of needle bearing. Refer to TM-258,
"Location of Needle Bearings and Bearing Races".

G
SCIA6179J

26. Install rear extension assembly (2WD) or adapter case assembly (AWD) according to the following proce-
H
dures.
a. 2WD
i. Install seal rings to output shaft. I

JPDIA0030ZZ
L

ii. Install parking gear to output shaft .

M

O
JPDIA0029ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-285 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
iii. Install output shaft to transmission case.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to mistake front for rear because both sides
looks similar. (Thinner end is front side.)

SCIA5030E

iv. Install bearing race to output shaft.

SCIA5245E

v. Apply recommended sealant to rear extension assembly as

shown in the figure.

: Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent. Refer to GI-

*
22, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".

Sealant starting
: Start and finish point shall be in
point and end-
the center of two bolts.
point
Overlap width of
sealant starting
: 3 – 5 mm (0.12 – 0.20 in)
point and end-
point (B)
Sealant width (C) : 1.0 – 2.0 mm (0.04 – 0.08 in)
Sealant height (C) : 0.4 – 1.0 mm (0.016 – 0.04 in)
CAUTION:
Completely remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc.
from the transmission case and rear extension assembly
mounting surfaces.

JSDIA1855ZZ

vi. Install rear extension assembly to transmission case.

CAUTION:
Insert the tip of parking rod between the parking pawl and
the parking actuator support when assembling the rear
extension assembly.

SCIA5029E

Revision: 2015 January TM-286 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
vii. Tighten rear extension assembly bolts to the specified torque.
A
: Bolt
: Self-sealing bolt
B

JPDIA1138ZZ

TM
b. AWD
i. Install seal rings to output shaft.
E

JPDIA0030ZZ

H
ii. Install parking gear to output shaft .

K
JPDIA0029ZZ

iii. Install output shaft to transmission case.

CAUTION: L
Be careful not to mistake front for rear because both sides
looks similar. (Thinner end is front side.)
M

SCIA5030E
O

Revision: 2015 January TM-287 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
iv. Install bearing race to output shaft.

SCIA5245E

v. Install gasket onto transmission case.

CAUTION:
• Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc.
from the transmission case and adapter case assembly
mounting surfaces.
• Never reuse gasket.

SCIA5231E

vi. Install adapter case assembly to transmission case.

CAUTION:
Insert the tip of parking rod between the parking pawl and
the parking actuator support when assembling the adapter
case assembly.

SCIA5186E

vii. Tighten adapter case assembly bolts to the specified torque.

: Bracket
: Bolt
: Self-sealing bolt

JPDIA1137ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-288 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
27. Install needle bearing to drum support.
CAUTION: A
Check the direction of needle bearing. Refer to TM-258,
"Location of Needle Bearings and Bearing Races".
B

SCIA5198E

TM
28. Install direct clutch assembly to reverse brake.
CAUTION:
Make sure that drum support edge surface and direct clutch
E
inner boss edge surface come to almost same place.

G
SCIA5019E

29. Install high and low reverse clutch assembly to direct clutch.
H

SCIA2306E
K
30. Align the drive plate using a flat-bladed screwdriver.

N
SCIA3169E

31. Install high and low reverse clutch hub, mid sun gear assembly, O
and rear sun gear assembly as a unit.

SCIA5018E

Revision: 2015 January TM-289 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]

CAUTION:
Make sure that portion (A) of high and low reverse clutch
drum protrudes approximately 2 mm (0.08 in) beyond por-
tion (B) of rear sun gear.

SCIA3130E

32. Install needle bearing to rear carrier assembly.

CAUTION:
Check the direction of needle bearing. Refer to TM-258,
"Location of Needle Bearings and Bearing Races".

SCIA2803E

33. Install bearing race to rear carrier assembly.

CAUTION:
Check the direction of needle bearing. Refer to TM-258,
"Location of Needle Bearings and Bearing Races".

SCIA5175E

34. Install rear carrier assembly to direct clutch drum.

SCIA2462E

Revision: 2015 January TM-290 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
35. Install needle bearing (rear side) to mid carrier assembly.
CAUTION: A
Check the direction of needle bearing. Refer to TM-258,
"Location of Needle Bearings and Bearing Races".
B

SCIA2804E

TM
36. Install needle bearing (front side) to mid carrier assembly.
CAUTION:
Check the direction of needle bearing. Refer to TM-258,
E
"Location of Needle Bearings and Bearing Races".

G
SCIA2805E

37. Install mid carrier assembly to rear carrier assembly.

H

SCIA5017E
K
38. Install seal rings to input clutch assembly.
L

N
JPDIA1121ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-291 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
39. Install needle bearing to front carrier assembly.
CAUTION:
Check the direction of needle bearing. Refer to TM-258,
"Location of Needle Bearings and Bearing Races".

JPDIA1120ZZ

40. Install input clutch assembly (with front carrier assembly and
rear internal gear) to transmission case.
CAUTION:
Check that the needle bearing is securely positioned. If
the needle bearing position is misaligned, adjust it to the
specified position.

JSDIA1714ZZ

41. Install 1st one-way clutch to front brake hub (with under drive
carrier) .
42. Check operation of 1st one-way clutch.
a. Hold 1st one-way clutch.
b. Check front brake hub for correct locking and unlocking direc-
tions.

: Unlocked
: Locked
JSDIA1713ZZ
CAUTION:
If not shown in figure, check installation direction of 1st one-way clutch.

Revision: 2015 January TM-292 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
43. Install under drive carrier (with 1st one-way clutch) to trans-
mission case. A

JSDIA1715ZZ

TM
44. Install snap ring to transmission case.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage snap ring. E

G
JPDIA1116ZZ

45. Install front brake component part (retaining plates, drive plates,
H
and driven plate) to transmission case.

: Retaining plate (thin)

I
: Drive plate
: Driven plate
: Retaining plate (thick) J
: Front

CAUTION: JPDIA1154ZZ
Check order of plates. K

46. Install needle bearing to under drive carrier assembly.

CAUTION: L
Check the direction of needle bearing. Refer to TM-258,
"Location of Needle Bearings and Bearing Races".
M

JPDIA1114ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-293 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
47. Install under drive sun gear to under drive carrier assembly.

JPDIA1112ZZ

48. Adjustment of total end play “T”.

• Measure clearance between bearing race and oil pump
cover .
• Select proper thickness of bearing race so that end play is
within specifications.

JSDIA1696ZZ

a. Measure dimensions “K” and “L”, and calculate dimension “J”.

: Transmission case
: Under drive sun gear
(A) : Straightedge

“J”: Distance between the oil pump fitting surface

of transmission case and the needle bearing
mating surface of under drive sun gear.
J=K–L JSDIA1697ZZ

i. Measure dimension “K” between the converter housing fitting

surface of transmission case and the needle bearing mating sur-
face of under drive sun gear.
CAUTION:
• Never change the straightedge (A) installation position
before the completion of “L” measurement.
• Measure dimension “K” in at least three places, and take
the average.

JSDIA1698ZZ

ii. Measure dimension “L” between the converter housing fitting

surface of transmission case and the oil pump fitting surface of
transmission case.

: Transmission case
(A) : Straightedge
CAUTION:
Measure dimension “L” in at least three places, and take
the average.
JSDIA1699ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-294 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
iii. Measure dimension “K” and “L” in at least three places, and take the average.
iv. Calculate dimension “J”. A

J=K–L
B
b. Measure dimensions “M1” and “M2”, and calculate dimension
“M”.

: Bearing race C
: Needle bearing
: Oil pump assembly TM
(A) : Straightedge

“M” : Distance between the transmission case fit- E

ting surface of oil pump and the needle bearing JSDIA1700ZZ

on oil pump.
M = M1– M2 F

i. Place bearing race and needle bearing on oil pump

assembly . G

JSDIA1701ZZ

J
ii. Measure dimension “M1” between the transmission case fitting
surface of oil pump and the end of oil pump.
K
: Bearing race
: Needle bearing
: Oil pump assembly L
(A) : Straightedge
CAUTION:
Measure dimension “M1” in at least three places, and take M
the average. JSDIA1702ZZ

iii. Measure dimension “M2” between the needle bearing on oil N

pump and the end of oil pump.

: Bearing race
O
: Needle bearing
: Oil pump assembly
(A) : Straightedge P
CAUTION:
Measure dimension “M2” in at least three places, and take
the average. JSDIA1703ZZ

iv. Calculate dimension “M”.

M = M1– M2

Revision: 2015 January TM-295 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
c. Adjust total end play “T”.

: Bearing race
: Oil pump assembly

T=J–M
Total end play “T” : Refer to TM-334, "Total End
Play".
• Select proper thickness of bearing race so that total end play
JSDIA1696ZZ
is within specifications.

Bearing races : Refer to TM-334, "Total End Play".

49. Adjustment of front brake clearance “C”.

• Measure clearance between front brake piston and front
brake retaining plate .
• Select proper thickness of front brake retaining plat so that
clearance is within specifications.

JSDIA1704ZZ

a. Measure dimensions “O” and “P”, and calculate dimension “N”.

: Transmission case
: Front brake retaining plate
(A) : Straightedge

“N”: Distance between the oil pump fitting surface

of transmission case and the front brake retain-
ing plate.
N=O–P JSDIA1705ZZ

i. Measure dimension “O” between the converter housing fitting

surface of transmission case and the front brake retaining
plate .
CAUTION:
• Never change the straightedge (A) installation position
before the completion of “P” measurement.
• Measure dimension “O” in at least three places, and take
the average.

JSDIA1706ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-296 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
ii. Measure dimension “P” between the converter housing fitting
surface of transmission case and the oil pump fitting surface of A
transmission case.

: Transmission case
B
(A) : Straightedge
CAUTION:
Measure dimension “P” in at least three places, and take C
the average.
iii. Calculate dimension “N”. JSDIA1707ZZ

TM
N=O–P

b. Measure dimensions “Q1” and “Q2”, and calculate dimension

“Q”. E

: Front brake piston

: Oil pump assembly F
(A) : Straightedge

G
“Q” : Distance between the transmission case fit-
ting surface of oil pump and the front brake pis-
ton. JSDIA1708ZZ
H
Q = Q1– Q2

i. Measure dimension “Q1” between the transmission case fitting

surface of oil pump and the straightedge on front brake piston. I

: Front brake piston

J
: Oil pump assembly
(A) : Straightedge
CAUTION: K
Measure dimension “Q1” in at least three places, and take
the average.
JSDIA1709ZZ
L
ii. Measure dimension “Q2” of the straightedge.

: Front brake piston M

: Oil pump assembly
(A) : Straightedge
N
iii. Calculate dimension “Q”.

Q = Q1– Q2 O
JSDIA1711ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-297 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
c. Adjust front brake clearance “C”.

: Front brake piston

: Front brake retaining plate

C=N–Q
Front brake clearance “C” : Refer to TM-334, "Front
Brake Clearance".
• Select proper thickness of retaining plate so that front brake
JSDIA1704ZZ
clearance is within specifications.

Retaining plate : Refer to TM-334, "Front Brake Clearance".

50. Remove under drive sun gear from under drive carrier
assembly.

JPDIA1112ZZ

51. Install needle bearing to under drive sun gear.

CAUTION:
Check the direction of needle bearing. Refer to TM-258,
"Location of Needle Bearings and Bearing Races".

JPDIA1113ZZ

52. Install O-ring to oil pump assembly.

JPDIA1110ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-298 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
53. Install seal ring to oil pump assembly.
A

JSDIA1721ZZ

TM
54. Install bearing race to oil pump assembly.

G
JPDIA1111ZZ

55. Install under drive sun gear (with needle bearing) to oil pump H
assembly .

JSDIA1712ZZ
K
56. Install oil pump assembly (with under drive sun gear) to trans-
mission case.
CAUTION: L
Apply ATF to oil pump bearing.

N
SCIA2811E

57. Apply recommended sealant to oil pump assembly as shown in O

the figure.

: Genuine RTV silicone sealant or equivalent. Refer to P

GI-22, "Recommended Chemical Products and Seal-
ants".
CAUTION:
Completely remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc.
from the oil pump mounting bolts and oil pump mounting
bolt mounting surfaces.
JSDIA1720ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-299 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]

58. Tighten oil pump bolts ( ) to the specified torque.

JPDIA1108ZZ

59. Install O-ring to input clutch assembly.

SCIA5011E

60. Install converter housing to transmission case, and tighten con-

verter housing bolts ( ) to the specified torque.

JSDIA1913ZZ

61. Connect TCM connector to joint connector.

JSDIA1813ZZ

62. Install joint connector to the control valve & TCM.

CAUTION:
Apply ATF to O-ring of joint connector.

JSDIA1719ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-300 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]

63. Install the control valve & TCM to transmission case.

A

JSDIA1823ZZ
TM
CAUTION:
• Make sure that input speed sensor securely installs input
speed sensor holes . E
• Hang down output speed sensor harness toward outside
so as not to disturb installation of the control valve &
TCM. F
• Adjust joint connector of the control valve & TCM to ter-
minal hole of transmission case.
G

JPDIA1106ZZ
H
• Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with
manual plate projection.
I

SCIA5035E

64. Install bolts and clip to the control valve & TCM. Tighten bolt L
to the specified torque before tightening the other than bolts.

: Front M

Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts

N
43 (1.69) 3

40 (1.57) 2
JPDIA1105ZZ
O
54 (2.13) 6

50 (1.97) 2

* 50 (1.97) 1 P
*: Reamer bolt

Revision: 2015 January TM-301 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
65. Connect output speed sensor connector (A).
66. Engage output speed sensor harness with terminal clips ( ).

JPDIA1104ZZ

67. Pull down joint connector .

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage connector.

JSDIA1764ZZ

68. Install snap ring to joint connector .

JSDIA1765ZZ

69. Install magnets to oil pan.

70. Install oil pan gasket to transmission case.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse oil pan gasket.
• Install it in the direction to align hole positions.
• Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc.
from oil pan gasket mounting surface.

JPDIA0009ZZ

71. Install oil pan and clips to transmission case.

: Front
: Oil pan mounting bolt

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to pinch harnesses.
• Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc.
from oil pan mounting surface.

JSDIA0793ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-302 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
72. Tighten oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque in numeri-
cal order shown in the figure after temporarily tightening them. A
Tighten oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque.

: Front B
CAUTION:
Never reuse oil pan mounting bolts.
73. Install drain plug to oil pan. Tighten drain plug to the specified C
torque.
CAUTION:
JSDIA0794ZZ
Never reuse drain plug gasket. TM
74. Pour ATF into torque converter.
• Approximately 2 liter (2-1/8 US qt, 1-3/4 Imp qt) of ATF is
required for a new torque converter. E
• When reusing old torque converter, add the same amount
of ATF as was drained.

G
SAT428DA

75. Install torque converter while aligning notches of torque con- H

verter with notches of oil pump.
CAUTION:
Install torque converter while rotating it.
I

SCIA5010E
K
76. Measure dimension “A” to make sure that torque converter is in
proper position.
L
(B) : Scale
(C) : Straightedge
M
Dimension (A) : Refer to TM-333, "Torque Converter".

JPDIA0042ZZ

Inspection INFOID:0000000011281254 O

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY

P
Oil Pan

Revision: 2015 January TM-303 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of mal-
function. If the ATF is very dark, smells burned, or contains foreign
particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may need replace-
ment. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish build up.
Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick and can
inhibit pump pressure.
• If frictional material is detected, perform A/T fluid cooler
cleaning. Refer to TM-99, "Cleaning".

SCIA5199E

Torque Converter
Check torque converter one-way clutch using a check tool as shown
at figure.
1. Insert a check tool into the groove of bearing support built into
one-way clutch outer race.
2. When fixing bearing support with a check tool, rotate one-way
clutch spline using a screwdriver.
3. Make sure that inner race rotates clockwise only. If not, replace
torque converter assembly.

SCIA3171E

1st One-way Clutch

Check operation of 1st one-way clutch.
1. Install 1st one-way clutch to front brake hub (with under drive
carrier).
2. Hold 1st one-way clutch.
3. Check front brake hub for correct locking and unlocking direc-
tions. If necessary, replace 1st one-way clutch.

: Unlocked
: Locked
JSDIA1713ZZ

Under Drive Sun Gear

Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace the under drive sun gear.
Mid Carrier Assembly
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace the mid carrier assembly.
Rear Carrier Assembly
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace the rear carrier assembly.
Reverse Brake Retaining Plate/Drive Plates/Driven Plates/Dish Plates
Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. If necessary, replace the damaged plate.
Front Brake Retaining Plates/Drive Plates/Driven Plate

Revision: 2015 January TM-304 2015 Q50

 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. If necessary, replace the damaged plate.
Each Snap Ring A
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace the snap ring.
Parking Actuator Support and Parking Pawl
B
If the contact surface on parking actuator support and parking
pawl has excessive wear, abrasion, bend or any other damage,
replace the components.
C

TM

JPDIA0034ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-305 2015 Q50

 OIL PUMP, 2346 BRAKE, FRONT BRAKE PISTON
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
OIL PUMP, 2346 BRAKE, FRONT BRAKE PISTON
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011281255

JPDIA1089GB

Oil pump housing oil seal Oil pump housing O-ring

Oil pump cover O-ring D-ring
D-ring Front brake piston Front brake spring retainer
Snap ring D-ring D-ring
2346 brake piston 2346 brake spring retainer Snap ring
Seal ring 2346 brake dish plate 2346 brake driven plate
2346 brake drive plate 2346 brake retaining plate Snap ring
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: Select with proper thickness.

: Apply ATF.

: Apply petroleum jelly.

: Apply Genuine RTV silicone sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-22, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".

Revision: 2015 January TM-306 2015 Q50

 OIL PUMP, 2346 BRAKE, FRONT BRAKE PISTON
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Disassembly INFOID:0000000011281256

A
1. Remove snap ring from oil pump assembly using a flat-
bladed screwdriver (A).
CAUTION: B
• Be careful not to scratch oil pump cover and 2346 brake
retaining plate.
• Be careful not to damage snap ring.
C

TM
JPDIA1090ZZ

2. Remove 2346 brake component part (retaining plate, drive E

plates, driven plates and dish plate) from oil pump assembly.

JPDIA1091ZZ H

3. Remove seal ring from oil pump assembly.

I

JPDIA1092ZZ

L
4. Set the clutch spring compressor (SST: KV31103800) (A) on
front brake spring retainer and remove snap ring (fixing front
brake spring retainer) from oil pump assembly while com-
pressing return spring. M
CAUTION:
Be careful not to expand snap ring excessively.
N

O
JSDIA1729ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-307 2015 Q50

 OIL PUMP, 2346 BRAKE, FRONT BRAKE PISTON
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
5. Remove front brake spring retainer from oil pump assembly.

JPDIA1094ZZ

6. Set the clutch spring compressor [SST: KV31102400 (J-34285

and J-34285-87)] (A) on 2346 brake spring retainer and remove
snap ring (fixing 2346 brake spring retainer) from oil pump
assembly while compressing return spring.

B : Press
CAUTION:
Be careful not to expand snap ring excessively.

JSDIA1730ZZ

7. Remove 2346 brake spring retainer from oil pump assembly.

JPDIA1096ZZ

8. Remove front brake piston from oil pump assembly with com-
pressed air. Refer to TM-258, "Oil Channel".

: Front brake pressure hole

CAUTION:
Care should be taken not to abruptly blow air. It makes pis-
ton incline, as the result, it becomes hard to disassemble
the piston.

JPDIA1097ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-308 2015 Q50

 OIL PUMP, 2346 BRAKE, FRONT BRAKE PISTON
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
9. Remove D-ring (inner) and D-ring (outer) from front brake
piston. A

JPDIA1098ZZ

TM
10. Remove 2346 brake piston from oil pump assembly with com-
pressed air. Refer to TM-258, "Oil Channel".
E
: 2346 brake pressure hole

CAUTION:
Care should be taken not to abruptly blow air. It makes pis- F
ton incline, as the result, it becomes hard to disassemble
the piston.
G

JPDIA1099ZZ
K
11. Remove D-ring (large) and D-ring (small) from 2346 brake
piston.
L

N
JPDIA1100ZZ

12. loosen bolts in numerical order shown in the figure and remove O
oil pump housing from oil pump cover.

: Bolt
P

JPDIA1101ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-309 2015 Q50

 OIL PUMP, 2346 BRAKE, FRONT BRAKE PISTON
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
13. Remove oil pump housing oil seal using a flat-bladed screw-
driver.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch oil pump housing.

SCIA2840E

14. Remove O-ring from oil pump housing.

SCIA2841E

15. Remove O-ring from oil pump cover.

JPDIA1102ZZ

Assembly INFOID:0000000011281257

1. Install O-ring to oil pump cover.

JPDIA1102ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-310 2015 Q50

 OIL PUMP, 2346 BRAKE, FRONT BRAKE PISTON
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
2. Install O-ring to oil pump housing.
A

SCIA2841E

TM
3. Using the drift, install oil pump housing oil seal to the oil pump
housing until it is flush.
CAUTION:
E
• Never reuse oil seal.
• Apply ATF to oil seal.

G
SCIA5313E

4. Install oil pump housing to oil pump cover and tighten bolts ( ) H
to the specified torque in numerical order shown in the figure
after temporarily tightening them.

JPDIA1101ZZ
K
5. Install D-ring (large) and D-ring (small) to 2346 brake pis-
ton.
L

N
JPDIA1100ZZ

6. Install 2346 brake piston to oil pump assembly. O

JSDIA1722ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-311 2015 Q50

 OIL PUMP, 2346 BRAKE, FRONT BRAKE PISTON
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]

7. Install D-ring (inner) and D-ring (outer) to front brake pis-

ton.

JPDIA1098ZZ

8. Install front brake piston to oil pump assembly.

JSDIA1723ZZ

9. Install 2346 brake spring retainer to oil pump assembly.

JPDIA1096ZZ

10. Set the clutch spring compressor [SST: KV31102400 (J-34285

and J-34285-87)] (A) on 2346 brake spring retainer and install
snap ring (fixing 2346 brake spring retainer) to oil pump
assembly while compressing return spring.

(B) : Press
CAUTION:
Be careful not to expand snap ring excessively.

JSDIA1730ZZ

11. Install front brake spring retainer to oil pump assembly.

JPDIA1094ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-312 2015 Q50

 OIL PUMP, 2346 BRAKE, FRONT BRAKE PISTON
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
12. Set the clutch spring compressor (SST: KV31103800) (A) on
front brake spring retainer and install snap ring (fixing front A
brake spring retainer) to oil pump assembly while compress-
ing return spring.
CAUTION: B
Be careful not to expand snap ring excessively.

JSDIA1729ZZ
TM
13. Install seal ring to oil pump assembly.

G
JPDIA1092ZZ

14. Install 2346 brake component part (retaining plate, drive plates, H
driven plates, dish plate and snap ring) to oil pump assembly.

: Dish plate
I
: Driven plate (four pieces)
: Drive plate (four pieces)
: Retaining plate J
: Snap ring

CAUTION: JPDIA1152ZZ K
• Check the order of plates.
• Never install snap ring mating part (A) to the clearance
groove [(B) shown in the figure] of oil pump cover.
L

N
JSDIA1724ZZ

Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000011281258 O

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY

Each Snap Ring P
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace snap ring.
Each Spring Retainer
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace spring retainer.
2346 Brake Retaining Plate/Drive Plates/Driven Plates/Dish Plate
Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. If necessary, replace the damaged plate.

Revision: 2015 January TM-313 2015 Q50

 OIL PUMP, 2346 BRAKE, FRONT BRAKE PISTON
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
INSPECTION AFTER ASSEMBLY
2346 Brake Clearance
Set a dial indicator (A) as shown in the figure. Blow air into 2346
brake oil pressure hole , and measure 2346 brake clearance. If
clearance is outside the specified value, adjust clearance by select-
ing an appropriate snap ring . Refer to TM-258, "Oil Channel".

Air pressure : 300 kPa (3.06 kg/cm2, 43.5 psi)

2346 brake : Refer to TM-334, "2346 Brake Clear-
clearance ance".
CAUTION:
Never exceed the specified air pressure value. JPDIA1148ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-314 2015 Q50

 UNDER DRIVE CARRIER, FRONT BRAKE HUB
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
UNDER DRIVE CARRIER, FRONT BRAKE HUB
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011281259

TM

G
JPDIA1127ZZ

Snap ring Under drive carrier assembly Front brake hub

H
Disassembly INFOID:0000000011281260

1. Remove snap ring from front brake hub using a flat-bladed I

screwdriver.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch front brake hub and under drive J
carrier assembly.
• Be careful not to damage snap ring.
K

JPDIA1128ZZ
L

2. Remove under drive carrier assembly from front brake hub.

M

JPDIA1129ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-315 2015 Q50

 UNDER DRIVE CARRIER, FRONT BRAKE HUB
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
3. Remove snap ring from front brake hub using a flat-bladed
screwdriver.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch front brake hub.
• Be careful not to damage snap ring.

JPDIA1130ZZ

Assembly INFOID:0000000011281261

1. Install snap ring to front brake hub.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage snap ring.

JPDIA1130ZZ

2. Install under drive carrier assembly to front brake hub.

JPDIA1129ZZ

3. Install snap ring to front brake hub using a flat-bladed screw-

driver.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch front brake hub.
• Be careful not to damage snap ring.

JPDIA1128ZZ

Inspection INFOID:0000000011281262

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY

• Each Snap Ring
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace snap ring.
• Under Drive Carrier Assembly
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace under drive carrier assembly.
• Front Brake Hub

Revision: 2015 January TM-316 2015 Q50

 UNDER DRIVE CARRIER, FRONT BRAKE HUB
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace front brake hub.
A

TM

Revision: 2015 January TM-317 2015 Q50

 FRONT CARRIER, INPUT CLUTCH, REAR INTERNAL GEAR
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
FRONT CARRIER, INPUT CLUTCH, REAR INTERNAL GEAR
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011281263

JPDIA1189ZZ

Needle bearing Snap ring Front carrier assembly

Needle bearing O-ring Seal ring
Input clutch drum Input clutch dish plate Input clutch driven plate
Input clutch drive plate Input clutch retaining plate Snap ring
Rear internal gear
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: Apply ATF.

: Apply petroleum jelly.

Revision: 2015 January TM-318 2015 Q50

 FRONT CARRIER, INPUT CLUTCH, REAR INTERNAL GEAR
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Disassembly INFOID:0000000011281264

A
1. Remove needle bearing from front carrier assembly.

TM
JPDIA1120ZZ

2. Compress snap ring using flat-bladed screwdrivers (A). E

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch rear internal gear.
• Be careful not to damage snap ring.
F
3. Remove front carrier assembly and input clutch assembly from
rear internal gear.
4. Remove front carrier assembly from input clutch assembly.
G

JPDIA1123ZZ H

5. Remove snap ring from front carrier assembly.

CAUTION:
I
Be careful not to expand snap ring excessively.

JPDIA1159ZZ

L
6. Remove O-ring and seal rings from input clutch assembly.

O
JPDIA1124ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-319 2015 Q50

 FRONT CARRIER, INPUT CLUTCH, REAR INTERNAL GEAR
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
7. Remove needle bearing from input clutch assembly.

SCIA2853E

8. Remove snap ring from input clutch drum using a flat-bladed

screwdriver.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch rear input clutch drum and input
clutch retaining plate.
• Be careful not to damage snap ring.
9. Remove input clutch component part (drive plates, driven plates,
retaining plate and dish plate) from input clutch drum.

SCIA2864E

Assembly INFOID:0000000011281265

1. Install input clutch component part (dish plate, drive plates,

driven plates and retaining plate) to input clutch drum.

: Snap ring
: Retaining plate
: Drive plate (six pieces)
: Driven plate (six pieces)
: Dish plate

CAUTION: JPDIA1192ZZ
Check order of plates.
2. Install snap ring to input clutch drum using a flat-bladed screw-
driver.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch input clutch drum and input
clutch retaining plate.
• Be careful not to damage snap ring.

SCIA2864E

Revision: 2015 January TM-320 2015 Q50

 FRONT CARRIER, INPUT CLUTCH, REAR INTERNAL GEAR
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
3. Install needle bearing to input clutch assembly.
CAUTION: A
Check the direction of needle bearing. Refer to TM-258,
"Location of Needle Bearings and Bearing Races".
B

SCIA2853E

TM
4. Install O-ring and seal rings to input clutch assembly.

G
JPDIA1124ZZ

5. Install snap ring to front carrier assembly. H

CAUTION:
Be careful not to expand snap ring excessively.

JPDIA1159ZZ
K
6. Compress snap ring using flat-bladed screwdrivers (A).
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch rear internal gear. L
• Be careful not to damage snap ring.
7. Install front carrier assembly and input clutch assembly to rear
internal gear. M

N
JPDIA1123ZZ

8. Install needle bearing to front carrier assembly. O

CAUTION:
Check the direction of needle bearing. Refer to TM-258,
"Location of Needle Bearings and Bearing Races". P

JPDIA1120ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-321 2015 Q50

 FRONT CARRIER, INPUT CLUTCH, REAR INTERNAL GEAR
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Inspection INFOID:0000000011281266

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY

Front Carrier Snap Ring
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace the snap ring.
Input Clutch Snap Ring
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace input clutch assembly.
Input Clutch Drum
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage or burns. If necessary, replace input clutch assembly.
Input Clutch Retaining Plate/Drive Plates/Driven Plates/Dish Plate
Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. If necessary, replace input clutch assembly.
Front Carrier
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace front carrier assembly.
Rear Internal Gear
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace rear internal gear.

Revision: 2015 January TM-322 2015 Q50

 MID SUN GEAR, REAR SUN GEAR, HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH HUB
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
MID SUN GEAR, REAR SUN GEAR, HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH
A
HUB
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011281267
B

TM

JSDIA1918ZZ

H
Mid sun gear Seal ring Rear sun gear
2nd one-way clutch Snap ring Needle bearing
High and low reverse clutch hub Snap ring Bearing race I
Needle bearing
: Always replace after every disassembly.
J
: Apply petroleum jelly.

Disassembly INFOID:0000000011281268
K
1. Remove needle bearing and bearing race from high and low
reverse clutch hub.
L

SCIA2854E

2. Remove snap ring from mid sun gear assembly using pair of O
snap ring pliers.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to expand snap ring excessively. P

SCIA2855E

Revision: 2015 January TM-323 2015 Q50

 MID SUN GEAR, REAR SUN GEAR, HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH HUB
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
3. Remove high and low reverse clutch hub from mid sun gear
assembly.

SCIA2856E

4. Remove needle bearing from high and low reverse clutch hub.

SCIA2857E

5. Remove rear sun gear assembly from mid sun gear assembly.

SCIA7018E

6. Remove snap ring from rear sun gear using a flat-bladed screw-
driver.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch rear sun gear and 2nd one-way
clutch.
• Be careful not to damage snap ring.

SCIA2859E

7. Remove 2nd one-way clutch from rear sun gear.

JSDIA1817ZZ

Revision: 2015 January TM-324 2015 Q50

 MID SUN GEAR, REAR SUN GEAR, HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH HUB
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
8. Remove seal rings from mid sun gear.
A

SCIA2861E
TM
Assembly INFOID:0000000011281269

1. Install seal rings to mid sun gear. E

H
SCIA2861E

2. Install 2nd one-way clutch to rear sun gear.

I

JSDIA1817ZZ
L
3. Install snap ring to rear sun gear using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch rear sun gear and 2nd one-way M
clutch.
• Be careful not to damage snap ring.

O
SCIA2859E

Revision: 2015 January TM-325 2015 Q50

 MID SUN GEAR, REAR SUN GEAR, HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH HUB
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
4. Install rear sun gear assembly to mid sun gear assembly.

SCIA7018E

5. Install needle bearing to high and low reverse clutch hub.

CAUTION:
Check the direction of needle bearing. Refer to TM-258,
"Location of Needle Bearings and Bearing Races".

SCIA2857E

6. Install high and low reverse clutch hub to mid sun gear assem-
bly.

SCIA2856E

7. Install snap ring to mid sun gear assembly using pair of snap
ring pliers.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to expand snap ring excessively.

SCIA2855E

8. Check operation of 2nd one-way clutch.

Revision: 2015 January TM-326 2015 Q50

 MID SUN GEAR, REAR SUN GEAR, HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH HUB
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
a. Hold mid sun gear and turn rear sun gear.
b. Check 2nd one-way clutch for correct locking and unlocking A
directions.
CAUTION:
If not as shown in the figure, check installation direction of B
2nd one-way clutch.

SCIA3132E

TM
9. Install needle bearing and bearing race to high and low reverse
clutch hub.
CAUTION:
E
Check the direction of needle bearing. Refer to TM-258,
"Location of Needle Bearings and Bearing Races".

G
SCIA2854E

Inspection INFOID:0000000011281270 H

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY

2nd One-way Clutch I
1. Hold mid sun gear and turn rear sun gear.
2. Check 2nd one-way clutch for correct locking and unlocking J
directions. If necessary, replace 2nd one-way clutch.

SCIA3132E

High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub Snap Ring, Rear Sun Gear Snap Ring M
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace the snap ring.
2nd One-way Clutch
Check frictional surface for wear or damage. If necessary, replace the 2nd one-way clutch. N
Mid Sun Gear
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace the mid sun gear.
O
Rear Sun Gear
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace the rear sun gear.
High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub P
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. If necessary, replace the high and low reverse clutch hub.

Revision: 2015 January TM-327 2015 Q50

 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011281271

JPDIA1191ZZ

Snap ring High and low reverse clutch retaining High and low reverse clutch drive
plate plate
High and low reverse clutch driven High and low reverse clutch dish Bearing race
plate plate
High and low reverse clutch drum
: Apply petroleum jelly.

Disassembly INFOID:0000000011281272

1. Remove bearing race from high and low reverse clutch drum.

SCIA5215E

2. Remove snap ring from high and low reverse clutch drum using
a flat-bladed screwdriver.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch high and low reverse clutch
drum.
• Be careful not to damage snap ring.
3. Remove high and low reverse clutch component (drive plates,
driven plates, retaining plate and dish plate) from high and low
reverse clutch drum.

SCIA2868E

Revision: 2015 January TM-328 2015 Q50

 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
Assembly INFOID:0000000011281273

A
1. Install high and low reverse clutch component part (dish plate,
drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate) to high and low
reverse clutch drum. B

: Snap ring
: Retaining plate C
: Drive plate (four pieces)
: Driven plate (four pieces)
TM
: Dish plate
JPDIA1194ZZ
CAUTION:
Check the order of plates. E
2. Install snap ring to high and low reverse clutch drum using a flat-
bladed screwdriver.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch high and low reverse clutch F
drum.
• Be careful not to damage snap ring.
G

H
SCIA2868E

3. Install bearing race to high and low reverse clutch drum.

I
CAUTION:
Check the direction of needle bearing. Refer to TM-258,
"Location of Needle Bearings and Bearing Races".
J

SCIA5215E
L

Inspection INFOID:0000000011281274

M
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Check the following items. If necessary, replace high and low reverse clutch assembly.
Snap Ring N
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
High and Low Reverse Clutch Retaining Plate/ Drive Plates/Driven Plates/Dish Plate
Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. O
High and Low Reverse Clutch Drum
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage or burns.
P

Revision: 2015 January TM-329 2015 Q50

 DIRECT CLUTCH
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
DIRECT CLUTCH
Exploded View INFOID:0000000011281275

JSDIA1949ZZ

Direct clutch drum Direct clutch driven plate Direct clutch retaining plate
Snap ring Direct clutch drive plate Direct clutch dish plate

Disassembly INFOID:0000000011281276

1. Remove snap rings from direct clutch drum using a flat-bladed

screwdriver.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch direct clutch drum and direct
clutch retaining plate.
• Be careful not to damage snap ring.
2. Remove direct clutch component part (drive plates, driven
plates, retaining plate and dish plate) from direct clutch drum.

SCIA2868E

Assembly INFOID:0000000011281277

1. Install direct clutch component part (drive plates, driven plates,

retaining plate and dish plate) to direct clutch drum.

: Snap ring
: Retaining plate
: Drive plate (five pieces)
: Driven plate (five pieces)
: Dish plate

CAUTION: JSDIA1919ZZ
Check the order of plates.

Revision: 2015 January TM-330 2015 Q50

 DIRECT CLUTCH
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [7AT: RE7R01A]
2. Install snap rings to direct clutch drum using a flat-bladed screw-
driver. A
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch direct clutch drum and direct
clutch retaining plate.
B
• Be careful not to damage snap ring.

SCIA2868E

TM
Inspection INFOID:0000000011281278

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY E

Check the following items. If necessary, replace direct clutch assembly.
Snap Ring
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. F
Direct Clutch Retaining Plate/Drive Plates/Driven Plates/Dish Plate
Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
Direct Clutch Drum G
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage or burns.

Revision: 2015 January TM-331 2015 Q50

 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [7AT: RE7R01A]

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specification INFOID:0000000011281279

Engine VQ37VHR
Applied models
Axle 2WD/AWD
Transmission model RE7R01A
Stall torque ratio 1.92 : 1
1st 4.783
2nd 3.103
3rd 1.984
4th 1.371
Transmission gear ratio
5th 1.000
6th 0.871
7th 0.776
Reverse 3.859
Recommended fluid and fluid capacity Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants".

Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs INFOID:0000000011281280

STANDARD MODE
Unit: km/h (MPH)
Throttle position
Gear position
Full throttle Half throttle
D1 → D2 56 – 60 (35 – 37) 41 – 45 (26 – 28)
D2 → D3 88 – 96 (55 – 59) 68 – 76 (43 – 47)
D3 → D4 134 – 144 (84 – 89) 103 – 113 (64 – 70)
D4 → D5 200 – 210 (125 – 130) 149 – 159 (93 – 98)
D5 → D6 251 – 261 (156 – 162) 185 – 195 (115 – 121)
D6 → D7 251 – 261 (156 – 162) 213 – 223 (133 – 138)
D7 → D6 240 – 250 (150 – 155) 138 – 148 (86 – 92)
D6 → D5 240 – 250 (150 – 155) 138 – 148 (86 – 92)
D5 → D4 172 – 182 (107 – 113) 99 – 109 (62 – 67)
D4 → D3 119 – 129 (74 – 80) 56 – 66 (35 – 41)
D3 → D2 60 – 68 (38 – 42) 31 – 39 (20 – 24)
D2 → D1 13 – 17 (8 – 10) 7 – 11 (5 – 6)

• At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.

ECO MODE
Unit: km/h (MPH)
Throttle position
Gear position
Full throttle Half throttle
D1 → D2 56 – 60 (35 – 37) 25 – 29 (16 – 18)
D2 → D3 88 – 96 (55 – 59) 45 – 54 (28 – 33)
D3 → D4 134 – 144 (84 – 89) 74 – 84 (46 – 52)
D4 → D5 200 – 210 (125 – 130) 116 – 126 (47 – 72)

Revision: 2015 January TM-332 2015 Q50

 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [7AT: RE7R01A]
Throttle position
Gear position A
Full throttle Half throttle
D5 → D6 251 – 261 (156 – 162) 175 – 185 (109 – 114)
D6 → D7 251 – 261 (156 – 162) 195 – 205 (122 – 127) B
D7 → D6 240 – 250 (150 – 155) 139 – 149 (87 – 92)
D6 → D5 195 – 205 (122 – 127) 139 – 149 (87 – 92)
D5 → D4 135 – 145 (84 – 90) 80 – 90 (50 – 55) C
D4 → D3 100 – 110 (63 – 68) 49 – 59 (31 – 36)
D3 → D2 43 – 51 (27 – 31) 23 – 31 (15 – 19)
TM
D2 → D1 3 – 7 (2 – 4) 3 – 7 (2 – 4)
• At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.
E
Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releases INFOID:0000000011281281

STANDARD MODE
F
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Throttle position
Lock-up ON Lock-up OFF
G
Closed throttle 36 – 44 (23 – 27) 36 – 44 (23 – 27)
Half throttle 36 – 44 (23 – 27) 36 – 44 (23 – 27)
• Vehicle speed with D5 position. H
• At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition. (Closed throttle position signal OFF)
• At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.
I
ECO MODE

Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)

Throttle position J
Lock-up ON Lock-up OFF
Closed throttle 49 – 57 (31 – 35) 49 – 57 (31 – 35)
Half throttle 61 – 69 (38 – 42) 61 – 69 (38 – 42) K
• Vehicle speed with D5 position.
• At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition. (Closed throttle position signal OFF)
• At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening. L

Stall Speed INFOID:0000000011281282

Unit: rpm
M

Stall speed 2,050 – 2,350

Torque Converter INFOID:0000000011281283 N

Unit: mm (in)
Dimension between end of converter housing and torque converter 25.0 (0.98) O

Revision: 2015 January TM-333 2015 Q50

 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [7AT: RE7R01A]
Total End Play INFOID:0000000011281284

Unit: mm (in)

Total end play Standard 0.25 – 0.55 (0.0098 – 0.0217)

1.0 (0.039)
1.2 (0.047)
1.4 (0.055)
Thickness of bearing race for adjusting total end play 1.6 (0.063)
1.8 (0.071)
2.0 (0.079)
2.2 (0.087)

Reverse Brake Clearance INFOID:0000000011281285

Unit: mm (in)

Reverse brake clearance Standard 0.8 – 1.2 (0.031 – 0.047)

4.8 (0.189)
5.0 (0.197)
5.2 (0.205)
Thickness of retaining plate for adjusting reverse brake clearance 5.4 (0.213)
5.6 (0.220)
5.8 (0.228)
6.0 (0.236)

Front Brake Clearance INFOID:0000000011281286

Unit: mm (in)

Front brake clearance Standard 0.7 – 1.1 (0.028 – 0.043)

2.0 (0.079)
2.2 (0.087)
Thickness of retaining plate for adjusting front brake clearance 2.4 (0.094)
2.6 (0.102)
2.8 (0.110)

2346 Brake Clearance INFOID:0000000011281287

Unit: mm (in)

2346 brake clearance Standard 1.5 – 1.9 (0.059 – 0.075)

2.0 (0.079)
2.2 (0.087)
2.4 (0.094)
Thickness of snap ring for adjusting 2346 brake clearance
2.6 (0.102)
2.8 (0.110)
3.0 (0.118)

Revision: 2015 January TM-334 2015 Q50